BS 5950: Part 1 : 1990

UDC 693.814: 669.14.018.29

8 ritish Standard
Structural use of steelwork
in building
Part 1. Code of practice for design in simple and
continuous construction: hot rolled sections

Aciers de construction
Partie 1. Code de bonne pratique pour Ia conception des ouvrages de construction
a
simple continue: profiles lamines chaud

Stahlkonstruktion im Bauwesen
Teil 1. Leitfaden fur die Verwendung warmgewalzter Profilstahle in
einfacher und Endlosbauweise

NO COPYING WITHOUT BSI PERMISSION EXCEPT AS PERMITTED BY COPYRIGHT LAW

 STANDARDS

Structural use of steelwork in building

Part 1. Code of practice for design in simple and
continuous construction: hot rolled sections

Revised text

AMD 6972 Contents

February 1992
In the list of tables:
(a) delete the title of table 4 and substitute 'Maximum thickness for adequate notch
thickness of parts subject to applied tensile stress';
(b) delete the title of table 6 and substitute 'Design strengths, Py ';
(c) in items (a) to (d) of tables 21 to 23, delete all references to 'Grade 43 steel' and
'Grade 50 steel' and delete the brackets around the text quantifying Py.

AMD 6972 Clause 1.2 Definitions

February 1992
At the end of the definitions clause, insert the following new definitions.
'1.2.46 design grade. Designation used to define specific
performance requirements of the material for design
purposes, in particular strength and toughness.
1.2.47 product grade. Designation used to define
mechanical and chemical properties and manufacturing
requirements of the material as specified in BS 5950 :
Part 2.'

AMD 6972 Clause 2.4.4.2 Maximum thickness

February 1992 Delete the second sentence.

AMD 6972 Table 4. Maximum thickness of parts subject to applied tensile stress
February 1992
Delete the entire table and substitute the following new table.

1
 Table 4. Maximum thickness for adequate notch toughness of parts subject to applied tensile stress
(see notes 1 to 6)
Design Internal External NOTE 1. For sections with flanges the thickness is the flange
grade conditions conditions thickness defined in the relevant British Standard.

K=l K=2 K=l K=2 NOTE 2. The relevant structural steel standard may require
Charpy values to be agreed for certain product grades and
thicknesses.
mm mm mm mm
NOTE 3. Where no value is shown, the maximum thickness
43A 25 50 15 30 for adequate notch toughness may be assumed to be in excess
438 25 50 15 30 of 100 mm.
438(T) 30 60 20 40 NOTE 4. The inclusion of a thickness limit in the table does
43C 60 - 40 80 not necessarily imply that steel of that thickness can be
supplied to that design grade in all product forms.
43D - - 90 -
NOTE 5. For design grades 43B(T) and 50B(T), verification
43DD - - - - of the impact properties of quality B by testing should be
43E - - - - specified under option 7 of BS EN 10025 when the steel is
43EE - - - - ordered.
NOTE 6. The maximum thickness values are based on a
50A 20 40 12 25 minimum Charpy value of 27 J* at the following test
508 20 40 12 25 temperatures.
508(T) 25 50 16 32 Design grades 43, 50 and 55
50C 45 90 30 60 Quality Test temperature
50D 100 - 70 - oc
50DD - - 100 - A (no test)
B +20
50E - - - - c 0
50EE - - - - D -20
50F - - - - DO -30*
E -40
55C 35 70 25 50 EE -50
F -60
55EE - - - -
Design grade WR 50
55F - - - - Quality Test temperature
WR50A 45 90 30 60 oc
WR508 45 90 30 60 A 0
WR50C 85 - 55 - B
c
0
-15

*For Fe 510 DD, BS EN 10025 specifies 40 J at -20 °C,

which is accepted as equivalent to 27 J at -30 ° C.

~MD 6972 Clause 2.5.2 Durability

'ebruary 1992
In the last line, delete 'to 8S 4360'.

AMD 6972 Clause 3.1.1 Strength of steel

February 1992
Delete paragraph 1 and substitute the following.
'This standard covers the design of structures fabricated
from weldable structural steels in designated design grades
supplied to the appropriate product grade as given in
8S 5950 : Part 2. Other steels, excluding rimming steels,
may also be used provided that due allowance be made for
variations in properties, including ductility and welda-
bil ity (see 8S 5950 : Part 2) .'
In paragraph 2, line 4, delete '8S 4360 (or agreed with
steelmaker).'and substitute 'the appropriate product
standard (see 8S 5950: Part 2).'

---------------------------------------------

2
AMD 6972 Table 6. Design strengths, Py, for steel to BS 4360
February 1992
Delete the entire table and substitute the following new table.

Table 6. Design strengths, Py

Design grade Thickness, Sections, plates and

less than or hollow sections
equal to Py

mm N/mm 2
43 16 275
40 265
63 255
80 245
100 235
50 16 355
40 345
63 335
80 325
100 315
55 16 450
25 430
40
63 400

AMD 6972 Clause 3.1.3 Steel castings and forgings

February 1992
Delete the last sentence and substitute the following.
'Design strengths corresponding to hot rolled steel of
design grade 43 may be adopted where no other
information is available.'

AMD 6972 Clause 3.3.3 Effective area at connections

February 1992
In lines 3 and 4, delete 'where for steels complying with BS 4360:' and substitute
'where:'.
Insert 'design' before 'grade' in each of lines 5, 6 and 7.

AMD 6972 Table 7. Limiting width to thickness ratios

February 1992
Against the entry for 'Legs of single angle and double angle members with components
separated', in column 5, insert 'and' between the two rows of formulae.

AMD 6972 Table 8. Strength reduction factors for slender elements

February 1992
In the heading for column 3, delete 'Stress' and substitute 'Strength'.
In the entry for 'Internal element of compression flange', in column 2, delete 'Build'
and substitute 'Built'.

3
 AMD 6972 Clause 4.3. 7. 7 Equal flanged rolled sections
February 1992 In paragraph 1, line 3, insert 'not' between 'are' and 'equal'.
In the definition of ''A', delete 'LE/r' and substitute 'LE!ry'·
In the definition of 'r', delete 'r' and substitute 'ry'·
In paragraph 4, line 4, insert 'the' between 'for' and 'value'.

AMD 6972 Table 21. Critical shear strength, qcr

February 1992
In the headings of items (a) to (d) of the table, delete all references to 'Grade 43 steel'
and 'Grade 50 steel' and delete the brackets around the text quantifyingPy-

AMD 6972 Table 22. Basic shear strength, qb

February 1992
In the headings of items (a) to (d) of the table, delete all references to 'Grade 43 steel'
and 'Grade 50 steel' and delete the brackets around the text quantifyingPy-

AMD 6972 Table 23. Flange dependent shear strength factor, qt

February 1992
In the headings of items (a) to (d) of the table, delete all references to 'Grade 43 steel'
and 'Grade 50 steel' and delete the brackets around the text quantifyingpy·

AMD 6972 Clause 4.12.4.2 General rules for empirical design

February 1992
In item (a), line 2, delete 'grade 43 of BS 4360' and substitute 'design grade 43'.

AMD 6972 Clause 4.13.1 General

February 1992
In paragraph 5, line 1, delete 'of grade 43A' and substitute 'of design grade 43A'.
In line 3, delete 'Grade 43A baseplates' and substitute 'Baseplates of design grade
43A steel'.

AMD 6972 Clause 5.3.3 Grades of steel

February 1992
Delete paragraph 1 and substitute the following.
'Steel for plastic design should comply with all three of
the following:'
In item (c), line 2,delete 'BS 18' and substitute 'BS EN 10002-1'.

AMD 6972 Clause 5.5.3.5.2

February 1992
In item (3) of (a):
(a) immediately after the first formula, insert 'design' between 'for' and 'grade';
(b) immediately after the second formula, insert 'design' between 'for' and 'grade'.

- - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

4
 AMD 6972 Table 33. Bearing strength of connected parts for ordinary bolts in
February 1992 clearance holes, Pbs
In the overall heading of columns 1 to 3, delete 'Steel to BS 4360' and substitute
'Design grade of steel'.

AMD 6972 Table 34. Bearing strength of parts connected by parallel shank friction
February 1992
grip fasteners, Pbg
In the overall heading of columns 1 to 3, delete 'Steel to BS 4360' and substitute
'Design grade of steel'.

AMD 6972 Clause 6.6.5.1 Design strength

February 1992
In paragraph 1, line 3, delete 'on steel complying with BS 4360'.

AMD 6972 Table 36. Design strength, Pw

February 1992
In the heading of column 1, delete 'Grade of steel in BS 4360' and substitute 'Design
grade of steel'.

AMD 6972 Publications referred to

February 1992
Delete the entries for BS 18 and BS 4360.
To the bottom of the list, insert the following new entries.
'BS EN 10002-1 Metallic materials- Tensile testing- Part 1 Method of test
BS EN 10025 Hot rolled products of non-alloy structural steels: Technical delivery conditions'

9202-2 CSB/27

5
 BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990

Contents

Page Page
Foreword 5 3.5 Limiting proportions of cross sections 16
Committees responsible Back cover 3.5.1 General 16
3.5.2 Classification of cross sections 16
Code of practice 3.5.3 Classification of elements 18
Section one. General 3.5.4 Webs of semi-compact sections 18
3.5.5 Compound flanges 18
1.0 Introduction 6
3.5.6 Longitudinally stiffened flanges 18
1.0.1 Aims of economical structural design 6
1.0.2 Overall stability 6 3.6 Slender cross sections 18
1.0.3 Accuracy of calculation 6 3.6.1 General 18
3.6.2 Sections with thin webs required to carry
1.1 Scope 6
shear 18
1.2 Definitions 6 3.6.3 Webs subject to moments and axial loads
1.3 Major symbols 7 and circular hollow sections 18
1.4 Other materials 8 3.6.4 Other elements 18

1.5 Design documents 8

Section four. Design of structural elements
1.6 Detailing 8
4.1 General 21
1.7 References to BS 5400 8 4.1.1 Scope 21
4.1.2 Class of cross section 21
Section two. Limit state design 4.1.3 Design strength 21
2.1 General principles and design methods 9
9 4.2 Members in bending 21
2.1.1 Lim it state concept 4.2.1 General 21
2.1.2 Methods of design 9
4.2.2 Full lateral restraint 21
2.2 Loading 10 21
4.2.3 Shear
2.2.1 General 10 21
4.2.4 Elastic shear stress
2.2.2 Dead, imposed and wind loading 10 21
4.2.5 Moment capacity with low shear load
2.2.3 Dynamic loads and impact effects 10 22
4.2.6 Moment capacity with high shear load
2.3 Temperature effects 10 4.3 Lateral torsional buckling 22
2.4 Ultimate limit states 10 4.3.1 General 22
2.4.1 Limit state of strength 10 4.3.2 Lateral restraints 22
2.4.2 Stability limit state 10 4.3.3 Torsional restraints 23
2.4.3 Fatigue 11 4.3.4 Destabilizing load 23
2.4.4 Brittle fracture 11 4.3.5 Effective lengths of beams 23
2.4.5 Structural integrity 11 4.3.6 Effective lengths of cantilevers 23
4.3.7 Lateral torsional buckling resistance of
2.5 Serviceability limit states 14
members subject to bending 23
2.5.1 Deflection 14
4.3.8 Buckling resistance moment for single angles 31
2.5.2 Durability 14
4.4 Plate girders 36
Section three. Properties of materials and section 4.4.1 General 36
properties 4.4.2 Dimensions of webs and flanges 36
4.4.3 Design strength of components 37
3.1 General 15
4.4.4 Moment capacity 37
3.1.1 Strength of steel 15
4.4.5 Shear buckling resistance of thin webs 37
3.1.2 Other properties of steel 15
4.4.6 Design of intermediate transverse web
3.1.3 Steel castings and forgings 15
stiffeners 52
3.2 Welds and fasteners 15
4.5 Web bearing, buckling and stiffener design 52
3.2.1 Welding consumables 15
15 4.5.1 General 52
3.2.2 Ordinary bolts, nuts and washers
4.5.2 Load carrying stiffeners 54
3.2.3 Friction grip fasteners 15
4.5.3 Bearing stiffeners 54
3.3 Section properties 15 4.5.4 Design of load carrying stiffeners 54
3.3.1 Gross section 15 4.5.5 Design of bearing stiffeners 54
3.3.2 Net area 15 4.5.6 Design of diagonal stiffeners 54
3.3.3 Effective area at connections 15 4.5.7 Design of tension stiffeners 54
3.4 Deductions for holes 16 4.5.8 Torsion stiffeners 54
3.4.1 Hole area 16 4.5.9 Connection to web of load carrying and
3.4.2 Holes not staggered 16 bearing stiffeners 55
3.4.3 Staggered holes 16 4.5.1 0 Connection to flanges: stiffeners in tension 55
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990

Page Page
4.5.11 Connection to flanges: stiffeners in Section five. Continuous construction
compression 55 5.1 General 79
4.5.12 Hollow sections 55 5.1.1 Scope 79
4.6 Axially loaded tension members 55 5.1.2 Loading 79
4.6.1 Tension capacity 55 5.1.3 Classification of multi-storey frames as sway
4.6.2 Eccentric connections 55 or non-sway 79
4.6.3 Effective areas of simple tension members 55 5.2 Elastic design 79
4.6.4 Laced or battened ties 56
5.3 Plastic design 79
4.7 Compression members 56 79
5.3.1 General
4.7.1 General 56 Type of loading 79
5.3.2
4.7.2 Effective lengths 56 79
5.3.3 Grades of steel
4.7.3 Slenderness 56 79
5.3.4 Geometrical properties
4.7.4 Compression resistance 57 80
5.3.5 Restraints
4.7.5 Compressive strength 57 80
5.3.6 Stiffeners at hinge locations
4.7.6 Eccentric connections 67 80
5.3.7 Fabrication restrictions
4.7.7 Columns in simple construction 67
4.7.8 Laced struts 67 5.4 Continuous beams 80
4.7.9 Battened struts 68 5.4.1 Elastic design 80
4.7.10 Angle, channel and T-section struts 68 5.4.2 Plastic design 80
4.7 .11 Batten-starred angle struts 69 5.5 Portal frames 80
4.7 .12 Battened parallel angle struts 69 5.5.1 General 80
4.7 .13 Back-to-back struts 69 5.5.2 Elastic design 80
5.5.3 Plastic design 80
4.8 Axially loaded members with moments 72
4.8.1 General 72 5.6 Multi-storey rigid frames: elastic design 82
4.8.2 Tension members with moments 72 5.6.1 General 82
4.8.3 Compression members with moments 72 5.6.2 Non-sway frames 82
5.6.3 Sway frames 83
4.9 Members with biaxial moments 73
5.6.4 Subframes 83
4.10 Empirical design rules for members in lattice
5.7 Multi-storey rigid frames: plastic design 83
frames and trusses 73
5.7 .1 General 83
4.11 Additional provisions for gantry girders 74 5.7.2 Non-sway frames 83
4.11.1 General 74 5.7.3 Sway frames 83
4.11.2 Crabbing of trolley 74
4.11.3 Lateral torsional buckling 74 Section six. Connections
4.11.4 Shear buckling 74
6.1 General recommendations 85
4.11.5 Local compression under wheels 74
6.1.1 General 85
4.11.6 Welded girders 74
6.1.2 Intersections 85
4.12 Purl ins and side rails 74 6.1.3 Joints in simple construction 85
4.12.1 General 74 6.1.4 Joints in rigid construction 85
4.12.2 Deflections 74 6.1.5 Joints in semi-rigid construction 85
4.12.3 Wind loading 74 6.1.6 Joints subject to vibration and/or load
4.12.4 Empirical design of purlins and side rails 74 reversal 85
4.13 Column bases 75 6.1.7 Splices 85
4.13.1 General 75 6.2 Fastener spacing and edge distances 85
4.13.2 Empirical design of baseplates 76 6.2.1 Minimum spacing 85
4.13.3 Connection of baseplates 76 6.2.2 Maximum spacing in unstiffened plates 85
4.14 Cased sections 76 6.2.3 Minimum edge and end distances 86
4.14.1 General 76 6.2.4 Maximum edge distances 86
4.14.2 Cased members subject to bending 77 6.3 Ordinary bolting 86
4.14.3 Cased struts 77 6.3.1 Effective areas of bolts 86
4.14.4 Cased members subject to axial load and 6.3.2 Shear capacity 86
moment 77 6.3.3 Bearing capacity 86
4.15 Web openings 77 6.3.4 Long joints 86
4.15.1 General 77 6.3.5 Large grip lengths 87
4.15.2 Sections other than castellated 78 6.3.6 Bolts subject to tension 87
4.15.3 Castellated beams 78 6.4 Friction grip fasteners 87
6.4.1 General 87

2
 BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990

Page Page
6.4.2 Parallel shank friction grip fasteners 88 10 Effective length, LE, for cantilever of length L 24
6.4.3 Waisted shank fasteners: slip resistance 88 11 Bending strength, Pb, (in N/mm 2 ) for rolled
6.4.4 Friction grip fasteners subject to external sections 25
tension 88 12 Bending strength,pb, (in N/mm 2 ) for welded
6.4.5 Combined shear and tension 88 sections 25
6.4.6 Holes for friction grip fasteners 88 13 Use of m and n factors for members of uniform
6.5 Pin connections 89 section 26
6.5.1 General 89 14 Slenderness factor v for flanged beams of
6.5.2 Tension members and pin plates 89 uniform section 27
6.5.3 Design of pins 89 15 Slenderness correction factor, n, for members
with applied loading substantially concentrated
6.6 Weld detail and design 89
within the middle fifth of the unrestrained
6.6.1 General 89
length 28
6.6.2 Details of fillet welds 89
6.6.3 Partial penetration butt welds 90 16 Slenderness correction factor, n, for members
Welded details for structural hollow sections 90 with applied loading other than as for table 15 29
6.6.4
6.6.5 Design of fillet welds 90 17 Moment diagram between adjacent points of
Design of butt welds 91 lateral restraint 30
6.6.6
18 Equivalent uniform moment factor, m 31
6.7 Holding-down bolts 91
19 Bending strength, Pb, (in N/mm 2 ) for rolled
sections with equal flanges
Section seven. loading tests
(a) Py = 265 N/mm 2 32
7.1 General 92 (b) Py = 275 N/mm 2 33
7.2 Test conditions 92 (c) Py = 340 N/mm 2 34
7.3 Test procedures (d) Py = 355 N/mm 2 35
92
7.3.1 Test loads 20 Slenderness correction factor, n, for standard
92
7.3.2 Preliminary loading 92 load conditions 36
7.3.3 Acceptance test 93 21 Critical shear strength, Qcr (in N/mm 2 )
7.3.4 Strength test 93 (a) Grade 43 steel (py = 265 N/mm 2 ) 40
7.3.5 Test to failure 93 (b) Grade 43 steel (Py = 275 N/mm 2 ) 41
7.3.6 Check tests 93 (c) Grade 50 steel (Py = 340 N/mm 2 ) 42
(d) Grade 50 steel (Py = 355 N/mm 2 ) 43
Appendices 22 Basic shear strength, qb (in N/mm 2 )
(a) Grade 43 steel (py = 265 N/mm 2 ) 44
A Formal statement of safety factor format
(b) Grade 43 steel (py = 275 N/mm 2 ) 45
adopted in BS 5950 : Part 1 to facilitate correla-
(c) Grade 50 steel (Pv = 340 N/mm 2 ) 46
tion with ISO 2394 and BS 5400 : Part 3 94 (d) Grade 50 steel (Py = 355 N/mm 2 ) 47
B Lateral torsional buckling of members subject to
23 Flange dependent shear strength factor, q 1
bending 95 (in N/mm 2 )
c Compression strength: Perry strut formula 98
(a) Grade 43 steel (Py = 260 N/mm 2 ) 48
D Effective lengths of struts in simple construction 98
(b) Grade 43 steel (Py = 275 N/mm 2 ) 49
E Effective lengths of struts in rigid frames 103
(c) Grade 50 steel (py = 340 N/mm 2 ) 50
F Frame instability 107
(d) Grade 50 steel (py = 355 N/mm 2 ) 51
G Design of restrained members with an
24 Nominal effective length, LE, for a strut 56
unrestrained compression flange 107
25 Strut table selection 57
H Web buckling 111
26 Type of section obtained for table 25 58
27 Compressive strength, Pc, (in N/mm 2 ) for struts 59
Tables
28 Angle, channel and T-section struts 70
1 Limit states 9 29 Empirical values for purl ins 75
2 Load factors and combinations 10 30 Empirical values for side rails 75
3 Factor K for location of material and tensile 31 Minimum edge and end distances to fasteners 86
stress 11 32 Strength of bolts in clearance holes 87
4 Maximum thickness of parts subjected to 33 Bearing strength on connected parts for
applied tensile stress 12 ordinary bolts in clearance holes, Pbs 87
5 Deflection limits other than for pitched roof 34 Bearing strength on parts connected by parallel
portal frames 14 shank friction grip fasteners, Pt:>g 88
6 Design strengths, Pv, for steel to BS 4360 15 35 Maximum dimensions of holes 89
7 Limiting width to thickness ratios 17 36 Design strength, Pw 90
8 Strength reduction factors for slender elements 19 37 Comparison of partial safety factors 95
9 Effective length, LE, for beams 23 38 Limiting :A for box sections of uniform wall
thickness, including RHS 97
39 Equivalent uniform moment factor, mt 111

3
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990

Page Page
Figures 20 Compound side stanchion with crane gantry 101
1 Staggered holes 16 21 Compound valley stanchion with crane gantry 102
2 Angles with holes in both legs 16 22 Restraint coefficients for limited frame 103
3 Dimensions of sections 20 23 Effective length ratio LEIL for a column in a
4 Effective shear area of typical sections 22 rigid-jointed frame braced against sidesway for
5 End panel designed not using tension field k3 = Oo
104
action 38 24 Effective length ratio LEI L for a column in a
6 End panel designed using tension field action rigid-jointed frame with unrestricted sidesway
(single stiffener) 39 for k 3 = 0 104
7 End panel designed using tension field action 25 Effective length ratio LEI L for a column in a
(double stiffener) rigid-jointed frame with partial sway bracing of
39
8 Stiff bearing length relative stiffness k 3 = 1 105
53
9 Dimensions of castellated sections 26 Effective length ratio LEIL for a column in a
78
10 Haunch restraints rigid-jointed frame with partial sway bracing of
81
11 Subframes relative stiffness k 3 = 2 105
84
11aMinimum edge and end distances 27 Critical buckling mode of frame braced against
86
12 Joint length at splice sidesway 106
87
13 Pin-t!nded tension members 90
28 Critical buckling mode of frame free to sway 106
14 Welded end connections 29 Members restrained on tension flange 108
90
15 Symmetrical fillet welds 30 Typical haunch 109
90
16 Dimensions for symmetrical plate girders 97 31 Value of f3t 110
17 Side stanchion 32 Intermediate moments 111
99
18 Side stanchion with restraints 100
19 Simple side stanchion with crane gantry 100

4
 BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990

Foreword

This Part of BS 5950 has been prepared under the direction This Part does not apply to other steel structures for which
of the Civil Engineering and Building Structures Standards appropriate British Standards exist.
Policy Committee. This Part of BS 5950 replaces BS 5950 :
It has been assumed in the drafting of this British Standard
Part 1 : 1985 which is withdrawn. BS 5950 is a document
that the execution of its provisions is entrusted to
combining codes of practice to cover the design construc-
appropriately qualified and experienced people and that
tion and fire protection of steel structures and specifications
construction and supervision should be carried out by
for materials, workmanship and erection.
capable and experienced organizations.
This edition introduces technical changes but it does not
The full list of organizations who have taken part in the
reflect a full review or revision of the standard, which will
work of the Technical Committee is given on the back
be undertaken in due course.
cover. The Chairman of the Committee is Mr P R Brett and
The changes introduced are indicated by a single side line in the following people have made a particular contribution
the margin of the page. in the drafting of the code.
BS 5950 comprises the following Parts: Mr P A Rutter Vice-Chairman
Mr PH Allen
Part l Code of practice for design in simple and
Mr B Auger
continuous construction: hot rolled sections
Mr R J Campion
Part 2 Specification for materials, fabrication and
Mr E F Hole
erection: hot rolled sections
Part 3 Design in composite construction Mr 8 L Hurst
Section 3. 1 Code of practice for design of Mr J C Kalra
Mr E G Lovejoy
simple and continuous composite beams
Dr DB Moore
*Section 3.2 Code of practice for design of
Prof. D A Nethercot
composite columns and frames
Dr M HOgle
Part 4 Code of practice for design of floors with
Mr P R Salter
profiled steel sheeting
Dr J E Spindel
Part 5 Code of practice for design of cold formed
Mr R Taggart
sections
Mr J C Taylor
Part 6* Code of practice for design in light gauge
Mr AD Weller
sheeting, decking and cladding
Dr F J Whitbread
Part 7*Specification for materials and workmanship:
cold formed sections Compliance with a British Standard does not of itself
Part 8 Code of practice for fire resistant design confer immunity from legal obligations.
Part 9 * Code of practice for stressed skin design
Part 1 gives recommendations for the design of structural
steelwork in simple and continuous construction and its
provisions apply to the majority of structures, although it is
recognized that cases will arise when other proven methods
of design may be more appropriate.

*In preparation.

5
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section one
Section one. General
1.0 Introduction
1.0.1 Aims of economical structural design
The aim of structural design is to provide, with due regard
to economy, a structure capable of fulfilling its intended
function and sustaining the design loads for its intended
life. The design should facilitate fabrication, erection and
future maintenance.
The structure should behave as one three-dimensional entity.
The layout of its constituent parts, such as foundations,
steelwork, connections and other structural components
should constitute a robust and stable structure under
normal loading to ensure that in the event of misuse or
accident, damage will not be disproportionate to the cause.
To achieve this it is necessary to define clearly the basic
structural anatomy by which the loads are transmitted to
the foundations. Any features of the structure which have a
critical influence on its overall stability can then be
identified and taken account of in design.
Each part of the structure should be sufficiently robust and
insensitive to the effects of minor incidental loads applied
during service that the safety of other parts is not prejudiced.
Reference should be made to 2.4.5.
While the ultimate strength requirements within this
standard are to be regarded as limiting values, the purpose
in design should be to reach these limits in as many parts of
the structure as possible, to adopt a layout such that
maximum structural efficiency is attained and to rationalize
the steel member sizes and details in order to obtain the
optimum combination of material and fabrication.
1.0.2 Overall stability
The designer responsible for the overall stability of the
structure should ensure the compatibility of design and
details of parts and components. There should be no doubt
of this responsibility for overall stability when some or all
of the design and details are not made by the same designer.
1.0.3 Accuracy of calculation
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular rule of the
standard is complied with, the final value, observed or
calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis should
be rounded off. The number of significant places retained
in the rounded off value should be the same as the value
given in this standard.
1.1 Scope
This Part of BS 5950 gives recommendations for the design
of structural steelwork with hot rolled steel sections, flats,
plates and hollow sections in buildings and allied structures
not specifically covered by other standards.
NOTE 1. These recommendations assume that the standards of
materials and construction are as specified in BS 5950 : Part 2.
NOTE 2. The publications referred to in this standard are listed on
the inside back cover.
6
1.2 Definitions
For the purposes of this Part of BS 5950, the following
definitions apply.
1.2.1 beam. A member predominately subject to bending.
1.2.2 brittle fracture. Brittle failure of steel at low
temperature.
1.2.3 buckling resistance. Limit of force or moment which
a member can withstand without buckling.
1.2.4 built-up. Constructed by interconnecting more than
one plate to form a single member.
1.2.5 cantilever. A beam which is fixed at one end and is
free to deflect at the other.
1.2.6 capacity. Limit of force or moment which may be
applied without causing failure due to yielding or rupture.
1.2.7 column. A vertical member of a structure carrying
axial load and possibly moments.
1.2.8 compact cross section. A cross section which can
develop the plastic moment capacity of the section but in
which local buck Iing prevents rotation at constant moment.
1.2.9 compound section. Constructed by interconnecting
one or more sections or plates and sections to form a single
member.
1.2.10 dead load. All loads of constant magnitude and
position that act permanently, including self weight.
1.2.11 design strength. The yield strength of the material
multiplied by the appropriate partial factor. See 3.1.1.
1.2.12 dynamic load. Part of an imposed load resulting
from motion.
1.2.13 edge distance. Distance from the centre of a fastener
hole to the nearest edge of an element.
1.2.14 effective length. Length between points of effective
restraint of a member multiplied by a factor to take account
of the end conditions and loading.
1.2.15 elastic design. Design which assumes no redistribu·
tion of moments due to plastic rotation of a section
throughout the structure.
1.2.16 empirical method. Simp! ified method of design
justified by experience or testing.
1.2.17 end distance. Distance from the centre of a fastener
hole to the edge of an element parallel to the direction in
which the fastener bears.
1.2.18 factored load. Specified load multiplied by the
relevant partial factor.
1.2.19 fatigue. Damage to a structural member caused by
repeated application of stresses that are insufficient to
cause failure by a single application.
1.2.20 foundation. Part of a structure which distributes
load directly to the ground.
1.2.21 friction grip connection. A bolted connection which
relies on friction to transmit shear between components.
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section one

1.2.22 H-section. A section with one central web and two 1.2.41 strength. Resistance to failure by yielding or
equal flanges which has an overall depth not greater than buckling.
1.2 times the width of the flange.
1.2.42 strut. A member of a structure carrying predomi-
1.2.23 hybrid. Composed of elements of more than one nantly compressive axial load.
strength grade of steel.
1.2.43 subframe. Part of a larger frame.
1.2.24 !-section. Section with central web and two equal
1.2.44 transverse. Direction perpendicular to the stronger
flanges which has an overall depth greater than 1.2 times
of the rectangular axes of the member.
the width of the flange.
1.2.25 imposed load. Load on a structure or member, 1.2.45 ultimate limit state. That state which if exceeded
other than wind load, produced by the external environment can cause collapse of part or whole of the structure.
and intended occupancy or use.
1.2.26 instability. Inability to carry further load due to 1.3 Major symbols
vanishing stiffness.
Area
1.2.27 lateral restraint
Effective area
For a beam. Restraint which prevents lateral movement of
the compression flange. Gross area
Shear area (bolts)
For a compression member. Restraint which prevents
lateral movement of the member in a particular plane. Tensile stress area (bolts)
Shear area (sections)
1.2.28 longitudinal. Along the length of the member.
Spacing of transverse stiffeners
1.2.29 pattern loading. Loading arranged in such a manner or Effective throat size of weld
as to give the most severe effect on a particular element. 8 Breadth
1.2.30 pitch. Distance between centres of fasteners lying in b Outstand
the direction of stress. or Width of panel
Stiff bearing length
1.2.31 plastic cross section. A cross section which can
Charpy impact value
develop a plastic hinge with sufficient rotation capacity to
allow redistribution of bending moments within the Depth of section
structure. or Diameter of section
or Diameter of hole
1.2.32 plastic design. Design method assuming redistribu- d Depth of web
tion of moment in continuous construction. or Nominal diameter of fastener
1.2.33 plastic moment. Moment capacity allowing for E Modulus of elasticity of steel
redistribution of stress within a cross section. End distance
1.2.34 pretensioned fastener. Fastener tensioned to a Compressive force due to axial load
specified proportion of its proof stress before connected Shear force (bolts)
components are loaded. Tensile force
1.2.35 semi-compact cross section. A cross section in Shear force (sections)
which the stress in the extreme fibres should be limited to Compressive stress due to axial load
yield because local buckling would prevent development of Shear stress
the plastic moment capacity in the section. Shear modulus of steel
1.2.36 serviceability limit states. Those limit states which Warping constant of section
when exceeded can lead to the structure being unfit for its Storey height
intended use. Second moment of area about the major axis
1.2.37 slender cross section. A cross section in which yield Second moment of area about the minor axis
of the extreme fibres cannot be attained because of Torsion constant of section
premature local buckling. Length of span
1.2.38 slenderness. The effective length divided by the Effective length
radius of gyration. Larger end moment
1.2.39 slip resistance. Limit of shear that can be applied Max,May Maximum buckling moment about the major or
before slip occurs in a friction grip connection. minor axis in the presence of axial load
Mb Buckling resistance moment (lateral torsional)
1.2.40 stability. Resistance of the structure or part of the
structure to overturning or overall failure. Mcx,Mcv Moment capacity of section about the major and
minor axes in the absence of axial load

7
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section one

Me Elastic critical moment x Torsional index of section

M0 Mid-length moment on a simply supported span Y5 Specified minimum yield strength of steel
equal to the unrestrained length Zx, Zv Elastic modulus about major and minor axes
Mrx,Mrv Reduced moment capacity of the section about a: Coefficient of linear thermal expansion
the major and minor axes in the presence of axial 0: 8 Modular ratio
load {3 Ratio of smaller to larger end moment
Mx ,Mv Applied moment about the major and minor axes
'Yt Overall load factor
Mxiiv Equivalent uniform moment about the major and 'Y2 Load variation factor, i.e. function of 'Y2 1 and 'Y2 2
minor axes
'Ym Material strength factor
m Equivalent uniform moment factor
'Y Ratio M/M0 , i.e. the ratio of the larger end
n Slenderness correction factor
moment to the mid-length moment on a simply
Pbb Bearing capacity of a bolt supported span equal to the unrestrained length
Pbg Bearing capacity of parts connected by friction
Deflection
grip fasteners
Pbs Bearing capacity of parts connected by ordinary
bolts
€ Constant (~v5 ) 112
Pc Compression resistance Slenderness, i.e. the effective length divided by
the radius of gyration
Pcx.Pcy Compression resistance considering buckling
Elastic critical load factor
about the major and minor axes only
Limiting equivalent slenderness
P, Shear capacity of a bolt
Equivalent slenderness
PsL Slip resistance provided by a friction grip fastener
Limiting slenderness
Pt Tension capacity of a member or fastener
Slip factor
Pv Shear capacity of a section
Poisson's ratio
Pb Bending strength
Pbb Bearing strength of a bolt
Pbg Bearing strength of parts connected by friction
1.4 Other materials
grip fasteners
Pbs Bearing strength of parts connected by ordinary Where other structural materials are used in association
bolts with steelwork they should comply with the appropriate
British Standard.
Pc Compressive strength
NOTE. Attention is drawn to the necessity of referring to local
Pe Euler strength regulations.
Ps Shear strength of a bolt
Pt. Tension strength of bolt
1.5 Design documents
Pw Design strength of a fillet weld
Pv Design strength of steel The design documents should contain sufficient information
to enable the design to be detailed and the structure
qb Basic shear strength of a web panel
fabricated and erected.
qcr Critical shear strength of web panel
The design documents should show the assumed behaviour
Q8 Elastic critical shear strength of web panel
of the structure, the design assumptions and whether the
q1 Flange dependent shear strength factor forces and reactions included are factored or unfactored.
rx, rv Radius of gyration of a member about its major
and minor axes
Sx, Sv Plastic modulus about the major and minor axes 1.6 Detailing
s Leg length of a fillet weld The connections between members should withstand the
T Thickness of a flange or leg forces and moments to which they will be subjected,
t Thickness of a web without undue deformation and without invalidating the
or As otherwise defined in a clause design assumptions.
U5 Specified minimum ultimate tensile strength of The detailing of the connections should take account of
the steel possible dimensional variations due to rolling margins and
u Buckling parameter of the section fabrication variations, leading to some degree of lack of fit.
Vb Shear buckling resistance of stiffened web
utilizing tension field action 1.7 References to BS 5400
Vcr Shear buckling resistance of stiffened or unstiffened
In BS 5400 the breakdown of partial safety factors,
web without utilizing tension field action
the assessment of material strengths, etc. are different,
v Slenderness factor for beam and these differences should be recognized.

8
 BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section two

Section two. Limit state design

2.1 General principles and design methods 2.1.2.3 Rigid design. The connections are assumed to be
capable of developing the strength and/or stiffness required
2.1.1 limit state concept by an analysis assuming full continuity. Such analysis may
Structures should be designed by considering the limit be made using either elastic or plastic methods.
states at which they would become unfit for their intended 2.1.2.4 Semi-rigid design. Some degree of connection
use, by applying appropriate factors for the ultimate limit stiffness is assumed, but insufficient to develop full
state and the serviceability limit state. continuity as follows.
Examples of limit states relevant to steel structures are (a) The moment and rotation capacity of the joints
given in table 1. should be based on experimental evidence, which may
permit some limited plasticity providing the ultimate
Table 1. Limit states tensile capacity of the fastener is not the failure criterion.
On this basis, the design should satisfy the strength,
Ultimate Serviceability stability and stiffness requirements of all parts of the
structure when partial continuity at the joints is to be
1 Strength (including general 5 Deflection taken into account in assessing moments and forces in
yielding, rupture, buckling 6 Vibration (e.g. wind the members.
and transformation into induced oscillation) (b) As an alternative, in simple beam and column
a mechanism)
7 Repairable damage structures an allowance may be made for the inter·
2 Stability against due to fatigue restraint of the connections between a beam and a
overturning and sway column by an end restraint moment not exceeding 10 %
8 Corrosion and
3 Fracture due to fatigue durability of the free moment applied to the beam, assuming this
4 Brittle fracture to be simply supported, provided that the following
apply.
The overall factor in any design has to cover variability of: ( 1) The beams and columns are designed by the
Material strength: 'Ym general rules applicable to simple design.
Loading: 'Yll (2) The frame is provided with lateral support or
braced against sidesway in both directions.
Structural performance: 'Yp
(3) The beams are designed for the maximum net
In this code the material factor, 'Ym , is taken as 1 .0
moment which includes an allowance for the restraint
(see 3.1.1). Depending on the type of load, values of 'Yfl
moment at one or both ends.
and 'Yp are assigned. The product of 'Yfl and 'Yp is the factor
'Yt. by which the specified loads are to be multiplied in (4) Each column is designed to resist the algebraic
checking the strength and stability of a structure (see sum of the restraint moments from the beams at the
table 2). same level on each side of the column, in addition to
moments due to eccentricity of connections.
A detailed breakdown of 'Y factors is given in appendix A.
(5) The assumed end restraint moment need not,
2.1.2 Methods of design however, be taken as 10% of the free moment for all
beams, provided that the same restraint moment is
2.1.2.1 General. The design of any structure or its parts used in the design of the column and beam at each
may be carried out by one of the methods given in 2.1.2.2 connection.
to 2.1.2.5.
(6) The beam-to-column connections are designed to
In all cases, the details of members and connections should transmit the appropriate restraint moment, in addition
be such as to realize the assumptions made in design without to the end reactions assuming the beams are simply
adversely affecting any other parts of the structure. supported.
2.1.2.2 Simple design. The connections between members (7) The welds and fasteners should be designed for
are assumed not to develop moments adversely affecting the actual moment capacity of the connection not
either the members or the structure as a whole. the assumed moment.
The distribution of forces may be determined assuming 2.1.2.5 Experimental verification. Where design of a
that members intersecting at a joint are pin connected. structure or element by calculation in accordance with any of
The necessary flexibility in connections may result in some the preceding methods is not practicable, or is inappropriate,
non-elastic deformation of the materials, other than the the strength, stability and stiffness may be confirmed by
fasteners. loading tests in accordance with section seven.
It is necessary to maintain stability against sway and the
provisions of 2.4.2.3 apply.

9
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section two

2.2 Loading
Table 2. Load factors and combinations
2.2.1 General
Loading Factor, It
All relevant loads should be considered separately and in
such realistic combinations as to comprise the most critical Dead load 1.4
effects on the elements and the structure as a whole.
Dead load restraining uplift or overturning 1.0
The magnitude and frequency of fluctuating loads should
Dead load acting with wind and imposed
also be considered.
loads combined 1.2
Loading conditions during erection should receive particular
attention. Settlement of supports may need to be taken Imposed load 1.6
into account. Imposed load acting with wind load 1.2
Wind load 1.4
2.2.2 Dead, imposed and wind loading Wind load acting with imposed load or
Reference should be made to BS 6399 : Part 1, BS 6399 : crane load 1.2
Part 3 and CP 3 : Chapter V : Part 2 for the determination Forces due to temperature effects 1.2
of the dead, imposed and wind loads.
Crane loading effects
2.2.3 Dynamic loads and impact effects Vertical load 1.6
These may be determined from BS 6399 : Part 1 in the case Vertical load acting with horizontal loads
of cranes. (crabbing or surge) 1.4
It is recommended that values for cranes of loading class 03 Horizontal load 1.6
and Q4 as defined in BS 2573 : Part 1 should be established Horizontal load acting with vertical 1.4
in consultation with the crane manufacturer.
Crane load acting with wind load* 1.2

2.3 Temperature effects
Where, in the design and erection of a structure, it is
necessary to take account of changes in temperature, it may
be assumed that in the UK the average temperature of
internal steelwork varies from -5 °C to +35 °C. The actual
range, however, depends on the location, type and purpose
of the structure and special consideration may be necessary
for structures in other conditions, and in locations abroad
subjected to different temperature ranges.
2.4 Ultimate limit states
2.4.1 Limit state of strength
2.4.1.1 General. In checking the strength and stability of
the structure the loads should be multiplied by the relevant
It factors given in table 2. The factored loads should be
applied in the most unfavourable realistic combination for
the part or effect under consideration.
The load capacity of each member and its connections,
as determined by the relevant provisions of this standard,
should be such that the factored loads would not cause
failure.
2.4.1.2 Overhead travelling cranes. The It factors given in
table 2 for vertical loads from overhead travelling cranes
should be applied to the dynamic crane loads, i.e. the static
vertical wheel loads increased by the appropriate allowance
for dynamic effects (see 2.2.3).
For cranes on outdoor gantries the wind loads on the
gantry and supporting structure should be obtained from:
(a) BS 2573 : Part 1, for cranes in the working condition;
(b) CP 3 : Chapter V : Part 2, for cranes which are not
working.
*When considering wind or imposed load and crane loading
acting together the value of 'Yf for dead load may be taken as 1 2.
Where a structure or member is subject to loads from two
or more cranes the crane loads should be taken as the
maximum vertical and horizontal loads acting simultaneously
where this is reasonably possible.
2.4.2 Stability limit state
2.4.2.1 General. In considering the overall stability of any
structure or part, the loads should be increased by the
relevant It factors given in table 2.
The designer should consider overall frame stability which
embraces stability against overturning and sway stability.
2.4.2.2 Stability against overturning. The factored loads,
considered separately and in combination, should not cause
the structure or any part of the structure (including the
foundations) to overturn or lift off its seating. The combin·
ation of dead, imposed and wind loads should be such as to
have the most severe effect on overall stability (see 2.2.1 ).
Account should be taken of probable variations in dead
load during construction or other temporary conditions.
2.4.2.3 Sway stability. All structures, including portions
between expansion joints, should have adequate stiffness
against sway.
To ensure this, in addition to designing for applied
horizontal loads, a separate check should be carried out
tor notional horizontal forces.

10
 BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section two

These notional forces may arise from practical imperfections 2.4.4 Brittle fracture
such as lack of verticality and should be taken as the greater
2.4.4.1 General. Brittle fracture need not be considered
of:
except in locations subject to tensile stresses in service due
1 %of factored dead load from that level, applied
to applied axial load or moment.
horizontally;
Where such tension exists then the maximum thickness may
0.50% of factored load (dead plus vertical imposed)
be determined from 2.4.4.2 if the service temperature does
from that level, applied horizontally. not fall below that normal in the UK, taken as -5 °C for
These notional forces should be assumed to act in any one internal conditions and -15 °C for external conditions.
direction at a time and should be applied at each roof and Where the steel is subjected to lower temperatures or where
floor level or their equivalent. They should be taken as the steel grade or thickness used is not covered by table 4
acting simultaneously with the factored dead plus vertical then the energy absorption should comply with 2.4.4.3,
imposed loads taken as: which may also be used in place of table 4.
1.4 X (unfactored dead load); and Where severe restraint conditions occur due to welding then
1.6 X ( unfactored vertical imposed load). reference should be made to BS 5400 or specialist advice.
The notional force should not: The recommendations of this clause do not apply to grade
(a) be applied when considering overturning; 43A base plates (see 4.13).
(b) be combined with the applied horizontal loads; 2.4.4.2 Maximum thickness. The maximum thickness for
(c) be combined with temperature effects; adequate notch toughness should not exceed the value
given in table 4 for the value of K determined from table 3.
(d) be taken to contribute to the net reactions at the
Where no value is shown, the maximum thickness of the
foundations. product form for guaranteed notch toughness in BS 4360
Sway stability may be provided for example by braced given in table 4 should not be exceeded.
frames, joint rigidity or by utilizing staircase, lift cores and 2.4.4.3 Energy absorption. The Charpy impact value, Cv,
shear walls. Whatever system is used, reversal of loading in joules, at the minimum service temperature should not
should be accommodated. The cladding floors and roof be less than:
should have adequate strength and be so secured to the
structural framework as to transmit all horizontal forces to ~
the points of sway resistance. Where such sway stability is 710K
provided by construction other than the steel framework, where
the steelwork designer should state clearly the need for
Y5 is the minimum yield strength of the material (in
such construction and the forces acting upon it (see 1.5).
N/mm 2 );
2.4.2.4 Foundation design. The design of foundations t is the thickness of material from which the specimen
should be in accordance with BS 8004 and should accom· is taken (in mm);
modate all the forces imposed on them. Attention should
K is determined from table 3.
be given to the method of connecting the steel superstructure
to the foundations and the anchorage of any holding down
bolts as recommended in 6.7. Table 3. Factor K for location of material and
Where it is necessary to quote the foundation reactions it tensile stress
should be clearly stated whether the forces and moments
result from factored or unfactored loads. Where they result Tensile stress Welded Unreamed Non- Drilled
due to factored location punched welded or
from factored loads the relevant "Yf factors for each load in loads at the holes location reamed
each combination should be stated. location being holes
considered
2.4.3 Fatigue
Fatigue need not be considered unless a structure or element N/mm 2
is subjected to numerous significant fluctuations of stress. ,;;;; 100 2 2 2 2
Stress changes due to fluctuations in wind loading need not
be considered but account should be taken of wind induced > 100 1 1 2 2
oscillations.
In the design of crane supporting structures only those 2.4.5 Structural integrity
members which support cranes of utilization classes U4 to
U9 as defined in BS 2573 need be checked for fatigue by 2.4.5.1 Requirements for all structures. All structures
reference to BS 5400 : Part 10. should follow the principles given in 1.0.1. The additional
requirements in 2.4.5.2 to 2.4.5.5 apply to buildings.
When designing for fatigue a "Yf factor of 1.0 should be used.

11
Table 4. Maximum thickness of parts subject to applied tensile stress (see note 1)

BS4360 Maximum thickn- for adequate Maximum supply thickn- in BS 4380 for guaranteed Charpy impact value, according to
notch toughn- (188 note 2) product type (188 note 3)

Internal External Sections Rectangular Circular Plat• Wide flats Flats and
conditions conditions (except hollow hoilow round and ....
hollow sactions sections square ban
grade K=1 K=2 K=1 K=2 sections) ....
co
co
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm 0

43A 25 50 15 30 (see note 4) n/a n/a (see note 4) (see note 4) (see note 4)
438 (see note 5) 30 60 20 40 100 n/a n/a 100 50 100
43C 60 40 80 100 16 40 100 50 100
430 90 100 16 40 100 50 100
4300 100 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
43E n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 75
43EE n/a 16 40 75 50 n/a

50A 20 40 12 25 (see note 4) n/a n/a (see note 4) (see note 4) (see note 4)
508 (see note 5) 25 50 16 32 100 n/a n/a 100 50 100
soc 45 90 30 60 100 16 40 100 50 100
500 100 70 100 16 40 100 50 100
5000 100 n/a n/a 100 50 n/a
50E 100 n/a n/a n/a n/a 75
50EE n/a 16 40 75 30 n/a
50F n/a n/a n/a 40 n/a n/a

55C 19 16 25 25 25 19
55EE n/a 16 25 63 50 63
55F n/a 16 25 40 n/a n/a

WR50A 12 12 12 12 12 12 (see note 6)

WR508 45 30 50 16 40 50 50 50
WR50C 50 16 40 50 50 50

NOTE 1. For sections with flanges the thickness is the flange thickness defined in BS 4.
NOTE 2. Where no value of maximum thickness for adequate notch toughness is shown, the maximum supply thickness in 85 4360 governs.
NOTE 3. n/a indicates that the product is not available in this grade.
NOTE 4. There is no Charpy test requirement in 85 4360 for grades 43A and 50A. The maximum thickness for adequate notch toughness governs.
NOTE 5. For grades 438 and 508, option 8.39 of 85 4360 should be invoked when the steel is ordered, otherwise the limits for grades 43A and 50A apply.
NOTE 6. 25 mm for round and square bars of grade WR50A.

Ties may be either steel members or steel reinforcement
embedded in concrete or masonry provided that they are
properly anchored to the steel framework.
Steel members provided for other purposes may be utilized
as ties. When checked as ties other loading may be ignored.
Beams designed to carry the floor or roof loading will
generally be suitable provided that their end connections
are capable of resisting tension.
All ties and their end connections should be of a standard
of robustness commensurate with the structure of which
they form a part and should be capable of carrying a
factored tensile load of not less than 75 kN at floors or
40 kN at roof level.
Ties are not required at a roof level where steelwork
supports. cladding weighing not more than 0.7 kN/m 2 and
carries roof loads only.
Where a building is provided with expansion joints, each
section between expansion joints should be treated as a
separate building for the purpose of this clause.
2.4.5.3 Additional requirements for certain multi-storey
buildings. Local or national regulations may stipulate that
tall multi-storey buildings be designed to localize accidental
damage.
Steel-framed buildings which satisfy the recommendations
of 1.0.1 and 2.4.5.2 may be assumed to meet this require-
ment provided that the five additional conditions given
below are met.
A tall multi-storey building which is required to be designed
to localize accidental damage but which does not satisfy
these five additional conditions should be checked as
recommended in 2.4.5.4.
(a) Sway resistance. The means of providing sway
resistance as recommended in 2.4.2.3 (i.e. steel bracing,
rigid joints, shear walls, staircase and lift cores, etc.)
should be sufficiently distributed throughout the
building so that no substantial portion of the structural
frame is solely reliant on a single plane of bracing in each
orthogonal direction.
(b) Tying. The ties referred to in 2.4.5.2 should be
arranged in continuous Iines wherever practicable
throughout each floor and roof level in two directions
approximately at right angles. These and their connec-
tions should be checked for the following factored
tensile loads, which need not be considered as additive
to other loads.
( 1) Generally. 0.5 WtStLa for any internal ties and
0.25WtStLa for edge ties but not less than 75 kN for
floors or 40 kN at roof level
where
Wt is the total factored dead and imposed load per
unit area of floor or roof;
st is the mean transverse spacing of the ties;
La is the greatest distance, in the direction of the
tie, between adjacent lines of columns or other
vertical supports.
13
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section two
(2) At the periphery. Ties anchoring columns at the
periphery of a floor or roof should be checked for the
force given in ( 1) but not less than 1 %of the factored
vertical load in the column at that level.
(c) Columns. All column splices should be capable of
resisting a tensile force of not less than two-thirds of
factored vertical load applied to the column from the
floor level next below the splice.
Except where the steel framework is of continuous
construction in at least one direction, the columns
should be carried through at each beam-to-column
connection.
(d) Integrity. Any beam which carries a column should
be checked, together with the members which support it,
for localization of damage as recommended in 2.4.5.4.
(e) Floor units. Where precast concrete or other heavy
floor or roof units are used they should be effectively
anchored in the direction of their span either to each
other over a support or directly to their supports as
recommended in BS 8110.
2.4.5.4 Localization of damage. Where required by 2.4.5.3
a building should be checked to see whether at each storey
in turn any single column, or beam carrying a column,
could be removed without causing collapse of more than
a limited portion of the building local to the member
concerned. Where the removal of one of these members
would cause failure in excess of appropriate limits that
member should be designed as a key element as recom-
mended in 2.4.5.5.
For the purposes of this provision, it may be assumed that
substantial permanent deformation of members and their
connections is acceptable.
In this check only one-third of the ordinary wind load and
one-third of the ordinary imposed load need be considered
together with the dead load, except that in the case of
buildings used predominantly for storage, or where the
imposed load is of a permanent nature, the full imposed
load should be used. The l't factor should be taken as 1.05
except that when considering overturning the dead load
supplying the restoring moment should be multiplied by a
f't factor of 0.9.
2.4.5.5 Key elements. Where it is required by 2.4.5.4 to
design a member as a key element, the accidental loading
should not be less than that stipulated.
Accidental loads should be applied to members from
appropriate directions together with the reactions from
other building components attached to the member which
are subject to the same loading but limited to the ultimate
strength of these components or their connections.
In this check the effects of ordinary loads should also be
considered, to the same extent and with the same l't factors
as recommended in 2.4.5.4 for localization of damage.
Any other steel member or other structural component
which provides lateral restraint vital to the stability of a key
element should itself also be designed as a key element for
the same accidental loading.
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section two

2.5 Serviceability limit states

Table 5. Deflection limits other than for pitched roof
portal frames 2.5.1 Deflection
The deflection under serviceability loads of a building or
(a) Deflection on beams due to unfactored imposed load part should not impair the strength or efficiency of the
structure or its components or cause damage to the finish-
Cantilevers Length/180 ings.
When checking for deflections the most adverse realistic
Beams carrying plaster or
combination and arrangement of serviceability loads should
other brittle finish Span/360
be assumed, and the structure may be assumed to be elastic.
All other beams Span/200 Table 5 gives recommended limitations for certain structural
members. Circumstances may arise where greater or lesser
Purl ins and sheeting rails See 4.12.2 values would be more appropriate. Other members may also
need a deflection limitation to be established, e.g. sway
(b) Horizontal deflection of columns other than portal bracing.
frames due to unfactored imposed and wind loads Generally the serviceability loads may be taken as the
unfactored imposed loads. When considering dead load plus
Tops of columns in imposed load plus wind load only 80% of the imposed load
single-storey buildings Height/300 and wind load need be considered. In the case of crane
surge and wind, only the greater effect of either need be
In each storey of a building Height of storey under considered in any load combination.
with more than one storey consideration/300
2.5.2 Durability
(c) Crane gantry girders In order to ensure the durability of the structure under
conditions relevant to both its intended use and intended
Vertical deflection due to life the following factors should be considered at the design
static wheel loads Span/600 stage:
(a) the environment;
Horizontal deflection (b) the degree of exposure;
(calculated on the top flange
properties alone) due to (c) the shape of the members and the structural detailing;
crane surge Span/500 (d) the protective measures if any;
(e) whether maintenance is possible.
NOTE 1. On low-pitched and flat roofs the possibility of pending
needs consideration. Reference should be made to BS 5493 in determining
NOTE 2. For limiting deflections in runway beams refer to
adequate methods of protection where applicable. Weather
BS 2853. resistant steel to BS 4360 may also be used.

14
 BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section three

Section three. Properties of materials and section properties

3.1 General 3.2 Welds and fasteners

3.1.1 Strength of steel 3.2.1 Welding consumables
This standard covers the design of structures fabricated All welding consumables (i.e. electrode wires, filler rods,
from steels supplied to BS 4360; other steels may be used flux, shielding gas, etc.) should comply with BS 5135.
provided due allowance is made for variations in properties,
including ductility. 3.2.2 Ordinary bolts, nuts and washers
The design strength, Pv, may be taken as 1.0 Y5 but not Bolts and nuts should comply with BS 4190 or BS 3692.
greater than 0.84U 5 where Y5 and U 5 are the minimum Bolts and nuts of material complying with BS 3692 made
yield strength and the minimum ultimate tensile strength to the size and tolerances of BS 4190 are permitted.
respectively as specified in BS 4360 (or agreed with Countersunk or cup headed bolts should comply with
steelmaker). BS 4933. High strength friction grip bolts complying with
For the more common types of steel Py may be obtained BS 4395 may be used untorqued. Nuts should be of a
from table 6. strength grade equal to or higher than the grade of bolt.
For rolled sections the thickness should be taken as the Washers should comply with BS 4320.
specified flange thickness from BS 4.
3.2.3 Friction grip fasteners
Table 6. Design strengths, Pv, for steel to BS 4360 High strength friction grip bolts and associated nuts and
washers should comply with BS 4395.
BS 4360 Grade Thickness, Sections, plates and Other types of friction grip fasteners may be used provided
less than or hollow sections
equal to
they have mechanical properties not inferior i:o bolts
Py
complying with BS 4395 and provided they can be reliably
mm N/mm 2 tightened to the minimum shank tensions specified in
43 16 275 BS 4604.
40 265
63 255
100 245 3.3 Section properties
50 16 355
40 345 3.3.1 Gross section
63 340 Gross section properties should be determined using the
100 325 specified size and profile of the member or elements,
55 16 450 but allowance should be made for openings larger than
25 430 required for fasteners. Battens or splices should not be
40 415 included.
63 400
3.3.2 Net area
Additional properties of steel are required for use in plastic The net area of a section or element of a section should be
design and reference should be made to 5.3.3. taken as its gross area less deductions for fastener holes as
given in 3.4.
3.1.2 Other properties of steel
3.3.3 Effective area at connections
The following values for the elastic properties should be
used: The effective area, A 8 , of each element of a member at a
connection, where fastener holes occur may be taken as Ka
Modulus of elasticity E = 205 kN/mm 2
times its net area, but not more than its gross area, where
Poisson's ratio v = 0.30 for steels complying with BS 4360:
Coefficient of linear Ke = 1.2 for grade 40 or 43
thermal expansion a:= 12 X 10-6 per °C
Ke = 1.1 for grade 50 or WR 50
3.1.3 Steel castings and forgings Ke = 1.0 for grade 55
Steel castings and forgings may be used for components in v.
for other steels, K8 = 0.75--
bearings, junctions and other similar parts. Castings should Y.
comply with BS 3100 and forgings with BS 29. Design but,;;; 1 .2
strengths corresponding to grade 43 steel may be adopted
where
where no other information is available.
v. is the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength;
Y. is the specified minimum yield strength.

15
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section three

3.4 Deductions for holes 3.5 Limiting proportions of cross sections

3.4.1 Hole area
In deducting for holes for fasteners (including countersunk
holes), the gross area of the hole in the plane of its axis and
not that of the fastener should be deducted.
3.4.2 Holes not staggered
The area to be deducted should be the maximum sum of
the sectional areas of the holes in any cross sections at right
angles to the direction of stress in the member.
3.4.3 Staggered holes
When holes are staggered the area to be deducted should be
the greater of:
(a) the deduction for non-staggered holes (see 3.4.2);
(b) the sum of the sectional areas of all holes in any
zig-zag line extending progressively across the member or
part of the member, less sp2 t/4g for each gauge space in
the chain of holes
where
sP is the staggered pitch, i.e. the distance, measured
parallel to the direction of stress in the member,
centre-to-centre of holes in consecutive lines,
see figure 1;
t is the thickness of the holed material;
g is the gauge, i.e. the distance, measured at right
angles to the direction of stress in the member,
centre-to-centre of holes in consecutive lines,
see figure 1.
For sections such as angles with holes in both legs the gauge
should be taken as the sum of the back marks to each hole,
less the leg thickness. See figure 2.
3.5.1 General
Local buckling can be avoided by limiting the width to
thickness ratios of each element of a cross section subject
to compression due to moment or axial load. Elements and
cross sections are classified as plastic, compact, semi-
compact or slender. Cross sections may be composed of
elements of different classes.
3.5.2 Classification of cross sections
Class 1. Plastic cross sections are those in which all elements
subject to compression comply with the values given in
table 7 for plastic elements. A plastic hinge can be developed
with sufficient rotation capacity to allow redistribution of
moments within the structure.
Only class 1 sections may be used for plastic design.
Class 2. Compact cross sections are those in which all
elements subject to compression comply with the values
given in table 7 for compact elements. The full plastic
moment capacity can be developed but local buckling may
prevent development of a plastic hinge with sufficient
rotation capacity to permit plastic design.
Class 2 sections can be used without restriction except for
plastic design.
Class 3. Semi-compact sections are those in which all
elements subject to compression comply with the values
given in table 7 for semi-compact elements. The stress at
the extreme fibres can reach the design strength but local
buckling may prevent the development of the full plastic
moment.
Class 3 sections are subject to limitations on their capacity
which are given in section four.

-+---+---+-
I I I

g > _.;;'--~---~~-

-+- -+-
I I
' ' < Direction
-L--+--t-- -+-- ---+-of stress
I

Sp Sp

Figure 1. Staggered holes Figure 2. Angles with holes in both legs

16
 BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section three

Table 7. Limiting width to thickness ratios

(Elements which exceed these limits are to be taken as class 4, slender cross sections.)

Type of element Type of section Class of section

(1) Plastic (2) Compact (3) Semi-compact

Outstand element of compression flange

Built-up by welding
b
y"'-7.5€ rb <.8.5e b
-:;:"'- 13€

Rolled sections
b
"T"'-8.5€
b
-r"'-9.5€ r "'- 15e
b

Internal element of compression flange b b b

Built-up by welding y"'-23€ r"'-25e T "28e
b b b
Rolled sections -:;:"'-26€ r"'-32e r-"'-39€

Web, with neutral axis at mid-depth d d d

All sections -<.79€ -"98e -<. 120€
t t t

Web, generally d 79€ !!_"" 98€

All sections -<. See 3.5.4
t 0.4+0.6a t a
Web, where whole section is subject to d d d
compression Built-up by welding - <.28€ - <.28e -<.28e
t t t

d d d
Rolled sections - <.39e -<.39e - <.39e
t t t

Legs of single angle and double angle Rolled angle b b b d

- <.8.5€ - <.9.5e -and-<. 15e
members with components separated sections T T T T
and and
d d b+d
-<.8.5€ - <.9.5e --<.23e
T T T

Outstand legs of double angle members Rolled angle b b b

with angles in contact back-to-back sections - <.8.5€ - <.9.5€ -"" 15€
T T T

Stems ofT-sections d d d
T-section - <.8.5€ - " 9.5€ -"" 19€
t t t

Circular tube subject to moment or CHS or built-up D D D

axial compression by welding - "40e 2 -"" 57€ 2 - ""80e 2
t t t
NOTE 1. Dimensions b, D, d, T, tare as defined in figure 3.
2Yc
a=-
d
where Yc is the distance from the plastic neutral axis to the edge of the web connected to the compression flange. But if a> 2 the
section should be taken as having compression throughout.
NOTE 2. Check webs for shear buckling in accordance with 4.4 when dlt > 63 e.
NOTE 3. e = c75r·
Py

17
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section three

Class 4. Slender sections are those which contain slender
elements subject to compression due to moment or axial
load. Local buckling may prevent the stress in a slender
section from reaching the design strength.
Design of class 4 sections is considered in 3.6.
3.5.3 Classification of elements
Flat elements in a cross section are either:
(a) internal elements attached on both longitudinal edges
to other elements or to longitudinal stiffeners which are
connected at suitable intervals to transverse stiffeners, or
(b) outstand elements attached on only one horizontal
edge to an adjacent element, the other edge being free.
Flat elements are generally of constant thickness. Tapered
elements may be treated as flat elements having the average
thickness defined in BS 4.
Elements may be classified as plastic, compact or semi·
compact if they meet the limits given in table 7. Those
which do not meet the limits for semi-compact elements
are classified as slender.
3.5.4 Webs of semi-compact sections
The limiting width to thickness ratio, d/t, for the web of a
semi-compact section is given by the following:
(a) when R is positive
( 1) for sections built-up by welding
d 120E (41 ) to carry shear the capacity of the cross section should be
t-~ 1 + 1.5R and~ -R -13 E calculated from 4.4.4.2.
3.5.6 Longitudinally stiffened flanges
The unsupported width, b, of a flange or part of a flange,
which is effectively supported along both edges either by a
web or a longitudinal stiffener, should be taken as the width
between adjacent lines of welds or fasteners connecting it to
the supporting elements. In rolled sections b should be
measured as shown in figure 3.
Where the free edge of the flange is supported by a
longitudinal stiffener, the flange thickness, T, should not be
less than b/20 unless the edge stiffener is itself supported at
suitable intervals.
Where the flange is stiffened by transverse as well as
longitudinal stiffeners or a web, the thickness, T, should not
be less than 1/100 of the smaller panel dimension a orb,
where a is a spacing of transverse stiffeners on the flange.
3.6 Slender cross sections
3.6.1 General
Local buckling may become the design criterion when the
proportions of elements in a cross section exceed those
given for semi-compact elements in table 7. Such cross
sections are defined as slender and their capacity is limited.
3.6.2 Sections with thin webs required to carry shear
Where thin webs which have a d/t ratio> 63E are required

(2) for rolled sections 3.6.3 Webs subject to moments and axial loads and
120E (41 circular hollow sections
d
-~ and~ - - 2) E
t 1 + 1.5R R In the absence of a more rigorous method of analysis a value
(b) when R is negative of the design strength, Pv, should be assumed such that the
limiting proportions for semi-compact sections are met
d 120E (see table 7). The same reduced value of Pv should be used
- ~ and ~250E
t (1 +R)2 for that element throughout the design of the section
in which R is the ratio of the mean longitudinal stress in the whenever it is in compression, except that such reduction
web to Pv• compression being taken as positive and tension need not be made in the design of connections to that
as negative. element.

3.5.5 Compound flanges 3.6.4 Other elements

The following width to thickness ratios should be con- Where a slender element is in compression the design
sidered: strength, Py, should be reduced by the factor given in
(a) the outstand of the compound flange compared to table 8. The same reduced value of Py should be used for
the thickness of the original flange; that element throughout the design of the section whenever
it is in compression except that such reduction need not be
(b) the internal width of each added plate between the made in the design of connections to that element.
lines of welds or fasteners which connect it to the
original flange, compared to its own thickness;
(c) any outstand of an added plate beyond the lines of
welds or fasteners which connect it to the original flange,
compared to its own thickness.

18
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section three

Table 8. Strength reduction factors for slender elements

Type of element Type of section Stress

reduction factor

Outstand element of Built up 10

compression flange by welding
---
b
--3
Te
Rolled 11
sections ---
b
--4
Te
Internal element of Build up 21
compression flange by welding ---
b
--7
Te
Rolled 31
sections ---
b
--8
Te
Legs of single angle Rolled angle The lesser of
and double angle section 11
members with
---
d
components separated --4
Te
and
19
(b+d)
---4
Te
Outstand legs of
double angle members Rolled angle -11-
b
with angles in - - 4
Te
contact back· to- back

Stems of T -sections 14
--
d
--5
te
NOTE 1. Dimensions b, d, t, Tare as defined in figure 3.

NOTE 2. € = c75r·
p;
NOTE 3. The strength of slender cross sections may be obtained
from 3.6.2, 3.6.3 and 3.6.4 as appropriate. Alternatively the
more rigorous approach given in BS 5950 : Part 5 may be used.

19
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section three

= =

=---

d t-. .,._ D
t

1.. 8 J
Rolled beams Rolled RHS b = 8- 3t
and columns channels d = D- 3t

d
T
_j

]~~
. ..jl Tees CHS
b
Angles
T b ,.. b .. , T

r1
I

d
' Double angles

_j_
t
T
_1
f
T

.--
1. .
b
. 11
,.
d d
..... ...... t
~

Fabricated sections
b
T
AT i1 _j

IF~ Ti
I I

Built-up sections (see 3.5.5)

T '
Figure 3. Dimensions of sections

20
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

Section four. Design of structural elements

4.1 General along the flange, provided that the dead load of the floor
and the imposed load it supports together constitute the
4.1.1 Scope dominant loading on the beam. The floor construction
This section gives rules for the design of simple elements or should be capable of resisting this lateral force.
elements comprising parts of frames.
4.2.3 Shear
4.1.2 Class of cross section Shear force Fv not greater than shear capacity Pv, where
Reference should be made to 3.5 for the classification of Pv = 0.6pyAv and Avis the shear area taken as follows:
cross sections. (a) rolled I, H and channel sections,
load parallel to web tD
4.1.3 Design strength (b) built-up sections and boxes,
The design strength should be obtained from table 6. load parallel to webs td
The reduction of 20 N/mm 2 given in 4.7.5 for welded (c) solid bars and plates 0.9A
elements in compression does not apply to the element (d) rectangular hollow sections,
(D~B) A
when it is checked for other effects such as bending, shear
load parallel to webs
and connections.
(e) circular hollow sections 0.6A
(f) any other case 0.9A 0
4.2 Members in bending
where
4.2.1 General t is the total web thickness;
4.2.1.1 Span of beams. The span of a beam should be 8 is the breadth;
taken between the effective points of support. D is the overall depth;
4.2.1.2 Length of cantilevers. The length of a cantilever d is the depth of the web;
should be taken as the distance from the effective point of A is the area of the section;
the support to the tip of the cantilever.
A 0 is the area of the rectilinear element of the section
4.2.1.3 General conditions. All members in bending should which has the largest dimension in the direction
meet the following conditions. parallel to the load.
(a) At critical points the combination of maximum When the depth to thickness ratio, d/t, of a web exceeds
moment and co-existent shear, and the combination of 63e then it should be checked for shear buckling in
maximum shear and co-existent moment should be accordance with 4.4.5.
checked.
(b) The deflection Iimits given in 2.5.1 should be 4.2.4 Elastic shear stress
considered. In sections where webs vary in thickness or have holes
(c) Unless the compression flange has full lateral significantly larger than those required for fasteners,
restraint, as indicated in 4.2.2, the resistance of the the shear stress should be calculated from first principles
member to lateral torsional buckling should be checked assuming elastic behaviour. In such cases the maximum
in accordance with 4.3. shear stress, fv, should not exceed 0.1Py-
(d) Local buckling should be considered as given in 3.6. 4.2.5 Moment capacity with low shear load
(e) When loads or reactions are applied through the Where Fv.;;;; 0.6Pv the moment capacity, Me, should be
flange to the web the conditions of 4.5 for bearing and taken as follows.
buckling should be met.
For plastic or compact sections:
4.2.2 Full lateral restraint
Me= PvS but.;;;; 1.2pyZ
When full lateral restraint is provided no reference need be NOTE. The elastic limitation is to prevent plasticity at working
made to 4.3 which deals with the lateral torsional buckling load. If S;;. 1.2Z then the 1.2 constant may be replaced by the
resistance of the member. ratio of the factored load to the unfactored load.
For semi-compact sections:
Full restraint exists if the frictional or positive connection
of a floor or other construction to the compression flange Me= PvZ
of the member is capable of resisting a lateral force of not For slender sections:
less than 2.5% of the maximum factored force in the com-
Me =pvZ
pression flange of the member, under factored loading.
This load should be considered as distributed uniformly where
Pv is the design strength (reduced for slender sections,
see 3.6);

21
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

S is the plastic modulus of the section about the
relevant axis;
Z is the elastic modulus of the section about the
relevant axis.
When the depth to thickness ratio, d!t, of a web exceeds
63€ then it should be checked for shear buckling in
accordance with 4.4.5.
When a beam requires lateral restraint within its span,
such restraint should have sufficient strength and stiffness
to inhibit lateral movement of the compression flange
relative to the supports. This may be provided by lateral
restraints or torsional restraints (see 4.3.2 and 4.3.3).
All beams should also satisfy the requirements of 4.2.1
and 4.2.3 to 4.2.6 inclusive.

4.2.6 Moment capacity with high shear load 4.3.2 lateral restraints

Where Fv > 0.6Pv the moment capacity, Me. should be 4.3.2.1 Where one or more lateral restraints are required
taken as follows. at intervals within the span of a beam, these intermediate
lateral restraints should be capable of resisting a total force
(a) For plastic or compact sections: of not less than 2.5% of the maximum factored force in
Me = Pv (S- SvPd but~ 1.2pvZ the compression flange, divided between the intermediate
2.5Fv lateral restraints in proportion to their spacing.
where p 1 = - - - 1.5
Pv The intermediate lateral restraints should either be con-
nected to an appropriate system of bracing capable of
and Sv is taken as follows:
transferring the restraint forces to the beam's effective
For sections with equal flanges: the plastic modulus points of support, or else connected to an independent
of the shear area, Av (see figure 4(a)); robust part of the structure capable of fulfilling a similar
For sections with unequal flanges: the plastic modulus function.
of the gross section less the plastic modulus of that Where two or more parallel members require lateral restraint
part of the section remaining after deduction of the at intervals, it is not adequate merely to connect the
shear area (see figure 4(b)). members together such that they become mutually depen-
(b) For semi-compact sections: dent.
Me= PvZ 4.3.2.2 Where three or more intermediate lateral restraints
(c) For slender sections: are provided, each intermediate lateral restraint should be
capable of resisting a force of not less than 1 % of the
Me =pvZ maximum factored force in the compression flange.
where Py and Z are as defined in 4.2.5.
In this case, the bracing system should be capable of resis-
When the depth to thickness ratio, d/t, of a web exceeds ting the greater of the effects of:
63€ then it should be checked for shear buckling in
(a) the 1 % restraint force considered as acting at only
accordance with 4.4.5.
one point at a time;
4.3 Lateral torsional buckling (b) the restraint forces described in 4.3.2.1.
4.3.2.3 Where more than three parallel members share the
4.3.1 General same system of restraints, the combined lateral restraint
A beam not provided with full lateral restraint as defined in force should be taken as the sum of the three largest lateral
4.2.2 should be checked for resistance to lateral torsional restraint forces required for each individual restrained
buckling. member, as determined in accordance with 4.3.2.1 and
4.3.2.2.

-- t d t d

Shear area = Av = tD Shear area = Av = td Shear area= Av = rd

Rolled section Welded section Welded section
(a) Equal flanges (b) Unequal flanges

Figure 4. Effective shear area of typical sections

22
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

4.3.2.4 Purlins adequately restrained by sheeting need not
normally be checked for the forces arising from the
restraining of rafters of roof trusses or portal frames carrying
predominantly roof loads, provided that either:
(a) there is bracing of adequate stiffness in the plane of
the rafters; or
(b) the roof sheeting is capable of acting as a diaphragm.
4.3.3 Torsional restraints
A beam may be taken as torsionally restrained (about its
longitudinal axis) at any point in its length where both the
flanges are effectively held in position relative to each other
by external means, (in the lateral direction).
Torsional restraint at support positions may be provided by
bearing stiffeners acting in conjunction with the bearing of
the beam (see 4.5.8).
Torsional restraint may be provided at any point by means
of a suitable diaphragm between two similar members or
else an equivalent panel of bracing. Alternatively such
restraint may be provided by external means.
A torsional restraint should be capable of resisting a couple
comprising forces of not less than 1 % of the maximum
factored force in the compression flange, acting at a lever
arm equal to the depth between the centroids of the flanges.
4.3.4 Destabilizing load
Destabilizing load conditions exist when a load is applied to
the top flange of a beam and both the load and the flange
are free to deflect laterally (and possibly rotationally also)
relative to the centroid of the beam.
4.3.5 Effective lengths of beams
When considering lateral torsional buckling, the effective
length, L E, of a beam should be taken as follows.
(a) For beams with lateral restraints at the ends only, the
value of LE should be obtained from table 9, taking Las
the span of the beam. If the conditions of restraint at each
end differ, the mean value of LE should be taken.
(b) For beams with effective lateral restraints at intervals
within their length, the value of LE should be taken as
1.0L for normal loading conditions or 1.2L for destabil·
izing loading conditions (see 4.3.4), taking L as the
distance between restraints.
(c) For a portion of a beam between one end and the
first intermediate restraint, account should be taken of
the conditions of restraint at the support. The effective
length L E should be taken as the mean of the value given
in item (b) and the value given by table 9 for the condit-
ions of restraint at the support, taking L as the distance
between the restraint and the support in both cases.
4.3.6 Effective lengths of cantilevers
4.3.6.1 With intermediate lateral restraint. If a cantilever
has intermediate restraints to the compression flange, or
when a moment is applied at the tip, the lengths between
restraints should be treated as beams; the effective length,
L E, should be taken from 4.3.5.
4.3.6.2 Without intermediate lateral restraint. When a
cantilever has no intermediate restraint to the compression
flange and no moment is applied to the tip, the effective
length, LE, should be taken from table 10.
4.3.7 Lateral torsional buckling resistance of members
subject to bending
4.3. 7.1 General. Equal flanged rolled sections may be
checked using the conservative approach in 4.3.7 .7.
For other members, or a portion of a member, between

Table 9. Effective length LE for beams

Conditions of restraint at supports Loading conditions

Normal Destabilizing

Compression flange laterally restrained Both flanges fully restrained against 0.7L 0.85L
Beam fully restrained against torsion rotation on plan

Both flanges partially restrained against 0.85L 1.0L

rotation on plan

Both flanges free to rotate on plan 1.0L 1.2L

Compression flange laterally unrestrained Restraint against torsion provided only by 1.0L + 20 1.2L + 2D
Both flanges free to rotate on plan positive connection of bottom flange to
supports

Restraint against torsion provided only 1.2L + 2D 1.4L + 2D

by dead bearing of bottom flange on
supports

D is the depth of the beam.

23
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

adjacent lateral restraints, subject to bending about their 4.3.7.2 Equivalent uniform moment, M. The equivalent
major axis the following condition should be satisfied: uniform moment, M, is given by:
M~Mb M=mMA
where where
M is the equivalent uniform moment; MA is the maximum moment on the member or the
Mb is the lateral torsional buckling resistance moment. portion of the member under consideration;
NOTE. For box sections of uniform thickness (including structural m is an equivalent uniform moment factor, determined
hollow sections) this check is unnecessary within the limits given from 4.3.7.6.
in 8.2.6.1 and Mb may be taken aspySx. For circular hollow
sections a lateral torsional buckling check is not required.

Table 10. Effective length, LE, for cantilever of length L

Restraint conditions Loading conditions

At support At tip Normal Destabilizing

Continuous with lateral restraint only Free 3.0L 7.5L

Laterally restrained
on top flange only 2.7L 7.5L
Torsionally restrained only 2.4L 4.5L
Laterally and
torsionally restrained 2.1 L 3.6L

Continuous with lateral and torsional restraint Free l.OL 2.5L

Laterally restrained
on top flange only 0.9L 2.5L
Torsionally restrained only O.BL 1.5L
Laterally and
torsionally restrained 0.1L 1.2L

Built- in laterally and torsionally Free O.BL 1.4L

Lateral restraint
on top flange only 0.1L 1.4L
Torsionally restrained only 0.6L 0.6L
Laterally and
torsionally restrained 0.5L 0.5L

Braced laterally

Top flange restraint Torsional restraint Lateral and torsional

restraint
NOTE. When values from this table are used for LEthe equivalent uniform moment factor, m, and the slenderness correction factor,
n, should be taken as 1.0.

24
 BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section four

4.3.7 .3 Buckling resistance, Mb. For members with at least 4.3.7.4 Bending strength, Pb· The bending strength, Pb.
one axis of symmetry the buckling resistance moment, Mb, is related to the equivalent slenderness, XL T, the design
is given by: strength of the materiai,Py. and member type, i.e. rolled or
fabricated by welding. Pb can be obtained from tables 11,
Mb = SxPb
12 or from the formulae in 8.2 on which these tables are
where based.
Sx is the plastic modulus of the section about the major
axis;
Pb is the bending strength determined from 4.3.7.4.

Table 11. Bending strength,pb, (in N/mm 2 ) for Table 12. Bending strength, Pb, (in N/mm 2 ) for
rolled sections welded sections

I~L

30
245

245
265

265
275

275
325

325
340

340
355

355
415

408
430

421
450

438
~ T

30
245

245
265

265
275

275
325

325
340

340
355

355
415

401
430

412
450

427
35 245 265 273 316 328 341 390 402 418 35 245 265 272 307 317 328 368 378 391
40 238 254 262 302 313 325 371 382 397 40 231 244 250 282 292 301 337 346 358
45 227 242 250 287 298 309 350 361 374 45 212 224 230 259 268 276 308 316 327
50 217 231 238 272 282 292 329 338 350 50 196 207 212 238 246 253 282 288 297

55 206 219 226 257 266 274 307 315 325 55 180 190 195 219 225 232 257 263 275
60 195 207 213 241 249 257 285 292 300 60 167 176 180 201 207 212 245 253 264
65 185 196 201 225 232 239 263 269 276 65 154 162 166 188 196 204 235 242 251
70 174 184 188 210 216 222 242 247 253 70 142 150 155 182 189 196 224 230 238
75 164 172 176 195 200 205 223 226 231 75 135 145 151 175 182 188 212 218 225

80 154 161 165 181 186 190 204 208 212 80 131 141 146 168 174 179 201 205 211
85 144 151 154 168 172 175 188 190 194 85 127 136 140 160 165 171 188 190 194
90 135 141 144 156 159 162 173 175 178 90 123 131 135 152 157 162 173 175 178
95 126 131 134 144 147 150 159 161 163 95 118 125 129 144 147 150 159 161 163
100 118 123 125 134 137 139 147 148 150 100 113 120 123 134 137 139 147 148 150

105 111 115 117 125 127 129 136 137 139 105 109 115 117 125 127 129 136 137 139
110 104 107 109 116 118 120 126 127 128 110 104 107 109 116 118 120 126 127 128
115 97 101 102 108 110 111 117 118 119 115 97 101 102 108 110 111 117 118 119
120 91 94 96 101 103 104 108 109 111 120 91 94 96 101 103 104 108 109 111
125 86 89 90 95 96 97 101 102 103 125 86 89 90 95 96 97 101 102 103

130 81 83 84 89 90 91 94 95 96 130 81 83 84 89 90 91 94 95 96
135 76 78 79 83 84 85 88 89 90 135 76 78 79 83 84 85 88 89 90
140 72 74 75 78 79 80 83 84 84 140 72 74 75 78 79 80 83 84 84
145 68 70 71 74 75 75 78 79 79 145 68 70 71 74 75 75 78 79 79
150 64 66 67 70 70 71 73 74 75 150 64 66 67 70 70 71 73 74 75

155 61 62 63 66 66 67 69 70 70 155 61 62 63 66 66 67 69 70 70
160 58 59 60 62 63 63 65 66 66 160 58 59 60 62 63 63 65 66 66
165 55 56 57 59 60 60 62 62 63 165 55 56 57 59 60 60 62 62 63
170 52 53 54 56 56 57 59 59 59 170 52 53 54 56 56 57 59 59 59
175 50 51 51 53 54 54 56 56 56 175 50 51 51 53 54 54 56 56 56

180 47 48 49 51 51 51 53 53 53 180 47 48 49 51 51 51 53 53 53
185 45 46 46 48 49 49 50 50 51 185 45 46 46 48 49 49 50 50 51
190 43 44 44 46 46 47 48 48 48 190 43 44 44 46 46 47 48 48 48
195 41 42 42 44 44 44 46 46 46 195 41 42 42 44 44 44 46 46 46
200 39 40 40 42 42 42 43 44 44 200 39 40 40 42 42 42 43 44 44

210 36 37 37 38 39 39 40 40 40 210 36 37 37 38 39 39 40 40 40
220 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 220 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37
230 31 31 31 32 33 33 33 34 34 230 31 31 31 32 33 33 33 34 34
240 29 29 29 30 30 30 31 31 31 240 29 29 29 30 30 30 31 31 31
250 27 27 27 28 28 28 29 29 29 250 27 27 27 28 28 28 29 29 29

25
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

4.3.7 .5 Determination of ALT. For flanged members

symmetrical about at least one axis and uniform through
its length:
ALT =nuvA
For members of other cross section, or of non-uniform
section, refer to 8.2.6, 8.2.7 and 8.3.
In the above equation:
Ais the minor axis slenderness:= LEirv where
LE is the effective length from 4.3.5 to 4.3.6;
rv is the radius of gyration about the minor axis of
the member.
u is a buckling parameter:
(a) for a ROLLED I, H, or channel section, u may be
taken from appendix 8, published tables or conserv-
atively as 0.9;
(b) for any other section, u may be taken from
appendix 8 or conservatively as 1.0.
v is a slenderness factor:
( 1) for fl<1nged members symmetric about one axis of
uniform section v may be determined from table 14
using Nand A!x in which:
where
let• Itt are the second moments of area of the
compression and tension flanges respectively
about the minor axis of the section;
A is defined above;
x is the torsional index and may be determined
from 8.2.5 or published tables. Alternatively,
x may be taken as D/T, provided that u is taken
as 0.9 for rolled sections, or 1.0 for other
sections.
NOTE. N = 0.5 for members with equal flanges.
(2) For other sections v may be determined from
8.2.5 using the formulae on which table 14 is based.
n is a slenderness correction factor: determined from
4.3.7.6.
4.3.7.6 Factors m and n. Factors m and n should be
determined from the following.
(a) Members of uniform cross section, see table 13.
(b) Members of non-uniform cross section, reference
should be made to 8.3.

Table 13. Use of m and n facton for members of uniform section

Description Members not subject to Members subject to

destabilizing loads destabilizing loads
(see 4.3.41 (see 4.3.4)

m n m n

Members loaded between adjacent lateral Sections with 1.0 From tables 1.0 1.0
restraints equal flanges 15 and 16

Sections with 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

unequal flanges

Members not loaded between adjacent Sections with From table 1.0 1.0 1.0
lateral restraints equal flanges 18

Sections with 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

unequal flanges

Cantilevers without intermediate lateral restraints 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

26
 BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section four

Table 14. Slenderness factor v for flanged beams of uniform section

T Compression

Tension T I [ _l Compression

Tension
j_

10:
0.5
1.0
1.0

0.79
0.78
0.9

0.81
0.80
0.8

0.84
0.83
0.7

0.88
0.87
0.6

0.93
0.92
0.5

1.00
0.99
0.4

1.11
1.10
0.3

128
127
02

1.57
1.53
0.1

220
2.11
0.0

12.67
6.36
1.5 0.77 0.80 0.82 0.86 0.91 0.97 1.08 124 1.48 1.98 421
2.0 0.76 0.78 0.81 0.85 0.89 0.96 1.06 120 1.42 1.84 324
2.5 0.75 0.77 0.80 0.83 0.88 0.93 1.03 1.16 1.35 1.70 2.62

3.0 0.74 0.76 0.78 0.82 0.86 0.91 1.00 1.12 129 1.57 2.21
3.5 0.72 0.74 0.77 0.80 0.84 0.89 0.97 1.07 1.22 1.46 1.93
4.0 0.71 0.73 0.75 0.78 0.82 0.86 0.94 1.03 1.16 1.36 1.71
4.5 0.69 0.71 0.73 0.76 0.80 0.84 0.91 0.99 1.11 1.27 1.55
5.0 0.68 0.70 0.72 0.75 0.78 0.82 0.88 0.95 1.05 120 1.41

5.5 0.66 0.68 0.70 0.73 0.76 0.79 0.85 0.92 1.01 1.13 1.31
6.0 0.65 0.67 0.69 0.71 0.74 0.77 0.82 0.89 0.97 1.07 1.22
6.5 0.64 0.65 0.67 0.70 0.72 0.75 0.80 0.86 0.93 1.02 1.14
7.0 0.63 0.64 0.66 0.68 0.70 0.73 0.78 0.83 0.89 0.97 1.08
7.5 0.61 0.63 0.65 0.67 0.69 0.72 0.76 0.80 0.86 0.93 1.02

8.0 0.60 0.62 0.63 0.65 0.67 0.70 0.74 0.78 0.83 0.89 0.98
8.5 0.59 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.66 0.68 0.72 0.76 0.80 0.86 0.93
9.0 0.58 0.59 0.61 0.63 0.64 0.67 0.70 0.74 0.78 0.83 0.90
9.5 0.57 0.58 0.60 0.61 0.63 0.65 0.68 0.72 0.76 0.80 0.86
10.0 0.56 0.57 0.59 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.67 0.70 0.74 0.78 0.83

11.0 0.54 0.55 0.57 0.58 0.60 0.61 0.64 0.67 0.70 0.73 0.78
12.0 0.53 0.54 0.55 0.56 0.58 0.59 0.61 0.64 0.66 0.70 0.73
13.0 0.51 0.52 0.53 0.54 0.56 0.57 0.59 0.61 0.64 0.66 0.69
14.0 0.50 0.51 0.52 0.53 0.54 0.55 0.57 0.59 0.61 0.63 0.66
15.0 0.49 0.49 0.50 0.51 0.52 0.53 0.55 0.57 0.59 0.61 0.63

16.0 0.47 0.48 0.49 0.50 0.51 0.52 0.53 0.55 0.57 0.59 0.61
17.0 0.46 0.47 0.48 0.49 0.49 0.50 0.52 0.53 0.55 0.57 0.58
18.0 0.45 0.46 0.47 0.47 0.48 0.49 0.50 0.52 0.53 0.55 0.56
19.0 0.44 0.45 0.46 0.46 0.47 0.48 0.49 0.50 0.52 0.53 0.55
20.0 0.43 0.44 0.45 0.45 0.46 0.47 0.48 0.49 0.50 0.51 0.53

NOTE. 1 For beams with EQUAL flanges, N = 0.5. For beams with UNEQUAL flanges refer to 4.3.7.5.
NOTE 2. v should be determined from the general formulae given in 8.2.5, on which this table is based:
(a) for sections with LIPPED flanges (e.g. gantry girders composed of channel+ universal beam); and
(b) for intermediate values to the right of the stepped line in the table.

27
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

Table 15. Slenderness correction factor, n, for members with applied loading substantially concentrated within
the middle fifth of the unrestrained length

-- rw
I' NOTE 1. All hogging moments are +ve.
_I L
~ maximum NOTE 2. {3 is defined in table 18.

H~~:<?lnH NOTE 3. M 0 is the mid-length moment on a simply

supported span equal to the unrestrained length

L
(see table 17).

""'"'";"L ''"gth l

{3 positive {3 negative

1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 -{).2 -{),6 -0.8 -1.0

+50.00 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.87 0.82 0.77 0.72 0.67 0.66 0.66 0.65
+10.00 0.99 0.99 0.94 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.75 0.69 0.68 0.68 0.67
+5.00 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.93 0.89 0.84 0.79 0.73 0.71 0.70 0.70
+2.00 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.89 0.84 0.79 0.77 0.76
+1.50 0.95 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.92 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.80
+1.00 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.92 0.92
+0.50 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.88

0.00 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86

-0.10 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86
-{).20 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.84 0.84 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.86 0.86 0.86
-{).30 0.81 0.82 0.82 0.83 0.83 0.84 0.85 0.85 0.86 0.86 0.87
-0.40 0.79 0.80 0.81 0.81 0.82 0.83 0.84 0.85 0.85 0.86 0.87
-{).50 0.77 0.78 0.79 0.80 0.82 0.83 0.85 0.86 0.86 0.87 0.88

-{).60 0.62 0.66 0.72 0.77 0.80 0.82 0.84 0.85 0.86 0.87 0.88
-{).70 0.56 0.56 0.61 0.67 0.73 0.79 0.83 0.85 0.87 0.88 0.89
-0.80 0.56 0.53 0.54 0.59 0.65 0.71 0.77 0.83 0.89 0.90 0.90
-{).90 0.59 0.57 0.54 0.53 0.57 0.64 0.71 0.77 0.84 0.88 0.91
-1.00 0.62 0.58 0.54 0.52 0.54 0.59 0.66 0.72 0.80 0.85 0.92

-1.10 0.66 0.62 0.57 0.54 0.54 0.57 0.63 0.68 0.76 0.83 0.89
-1.20 0.70 0.66 0.60 0.55 0.54 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.73 0.80 0.87
-1.30 0.73 0.69 0.63 0.57 0.55 0.54 0.57 0.61 0.69 0.77 0.83
-1.40 0.74 0.70 0.64 0.58 0.56 0.54 0.55 0.60 0.66 0.74 0.81
-1.50 0.75 0.70 0.64 0.59 0.56 0.54 0.55 0.59 0.65 0.73 0.80

-1.60 0.76 0.72 0.65 0.60 0.57 0.55 0.55 0.58 0.64 0.72 0.80
-1.70 0.77 0.74 0.66 0.61 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.58 0.63 0.70 0.78
-1.80 0.79 0.77 0.68 0.63 0.59 0.56 0.56 0.57 0.62 0.69 0.76
-1.90 0.80 0.79 0.69 0.64 0.60 0.57 0.56 0.57 0.61 0.67 0.75
-2.00 0.81 0.81 0.70 0.65 0.61 0.58 0.56 0.56 0.60 0.66 0.74

-5.00 0.93 0.89 0.83 0.77 0.72 0.67 0.64 0.61 0.60 0.62 0.65
-50.00 0.99 0.95 0.90 0.86 0.79 0.74 0.70 0.67 0.64 0.63 0.65

Infinity 1.00 0.96 0.91 0.86 0.82 0.77 0.72 0.68 0.65 0.65 0.65

NOTE 4. The values of n in this table apply only to members of UNIFORM section.
NOTE 5. Values for intermediate values of {3 and I' may be interpolated.
NOTE 6. When n from this table is used, m = 1 .00.

28
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

Table 16. Slenderness correction factor, n, for members with applied loading other than as for table 15

[ NOTE 1. All hogging moments are +ve.

NOTE 2. ~is defined in table 18.

H ~0t-=-----2) OM NOTE 3. M0 is the mid-length moment on a simply

~~
supported span equal to the unrestrained length
I
(see table 17).

I
Unrestrained length L

~positive ~negative
'Y=M/M 0
1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 -02 -0.4 -0.6 -0.8 -1.0

+50.00 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.87 0.83 0.77 0.72 0.67 0.66 0.66 0.65
+10.00 0.99 0.98 0.95 0.91 0.86 0.81 0.76 0.70 0.68 0.68 0.67
+5.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.75 0.71 0.70 0.70
+2.00 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.94 0.92 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.78 0.76
+1.50 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.93 0.92 0.89 0.86 0.83 0.79
+1.00 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.91 0.89
+0.50 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.93 0.92

0.00 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94

-0.10 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94
-0.20 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.94 0.94 0.93
-0.30 0.91 0.91 0.92 0.92 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.94 0.94 0.94
-0.40 0.90 0.90 0.91 0.91 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.93 0.93 0.93
-0.50 0.89 0.90 0.91 0.91 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92

-0.60 0.71 0.77 0.84 0.87 0.89 0.91 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92
-0.70 0.57 0.64 0.70 0.77 0.82 0.87 0.89 0.91 0.92 0.92 0.91
-0.80 0.47 0.52 0.59 0.67 0.73 0.80 0.86 0.90 0.92 0.92 0.92
-0.90 0.47 0.46 0.50 0.58 0.65 0.73 0.80 0.87 0.90 0.90 0.90
-1.00 0.50 0.48 0.46 0.51 0.58 0.66 0.73 0.81 0.87 0.89 0.89

-1.10 0.54 0.51 0.48 0.49 0.54 0.61 0.69 0.77 0.83 0.87 0.88
-1.20 0.57 0.54 0.50 0.47 0.51 0.56 0.64 0.73 0.80 0.84 0.87
-1.30 0.61 0.56 0.52 0.47 0.49 0.53 0.61 0.70 0.77 0.82 0.86
-1.40 0.64 0.59 0.55 0.49 0.48 0.51 0.58 0.67 0.74 0.79 0.85
-1.50 0.67 0.62 0.57 0.51 0.47 0.49 0.56 0.64 0.71 0.77 0.84

-1.60 0.69 0.64 0.59 0.52 0.48 0.50 0.55 0.63 0.69 0.76 0.83
-1.70 0.71 0.66 0.60 0.54 0.50 0.51 0.55 0.61 0.68 0.74 0.82
-1.80 0.74 0.69 0.62 0.55 0.51 0.51 0.54 0.60 0.66 0.73 0.81
-1.90 0.76 0.71 0.63 0.57 0.53 0.52 0.54 0.58 0.65 0.71 0.80
-2.00 0.78 0.73 0.65 0.58 0.54 0.53 0.53 0.57 0.63 0.70 0.79

-5.00 0.91 0.86 0.80 0.74 0.70 0.65 0.62 0.59 0.58 0.61 0.67
-50.00 0.99 0.95 0.89 0.84 0.79 0.74 0.70 0.66 0.63 0.62 0.65

Infinity 1.00 0.96 0.91 0.86 0.82 0.77 0.72 0.68 0.65 0.65 0.65

NOTE 4. The values of n in this table apply only to members of UNIFORM section.
NOTE 5. Values for intermediate values of {3 and')' may be interpolated.
NOTE 6. When n from this table is used, m = 1.00.

29
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

Table 17. Moment diagram between adjacent points

of lateral restraint

f1

(3 + ve 'Y + ve

H
~ Z"ZJ n
YLUfZ H

(3 + ve 'Y- ve

Ho

f1
---l --
(3 + ve 'Y- ve

(JH

(3- ve 'Y + ve

(3- ve 'Y- ve

H
fJH

(3- ve 'Y- ve

30
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

Table 18. Equivalent uniform moment factor, m

{3 m

Beta positive 1.0 1.00

0.9 0.95
!
0.8 0.90
0.7 0.85
H(. )rm 0.6 0.80

HI l '
fJH
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.76
0.72
0.68
0.64
0.60

0.0 0.57
Beta negative -o.1 0.54
-o.2 0.51
-o.3 0.48
-Q.4 0.45
H( y)nH
•
He:-----__
-o.s
to 0.43

----.Jf3H -1.0

NOTE 1. The values of m in this table apply only to end moments applied to beams of UNIFORM section with EQUAL flanges.
In all other cases, m = 1.0.
NOTE 2. Values of m for intermediate values of {3 may be interpolated, or determined from the equation:
m = 0.57 + 0.33{3 + 0.10{3 2 ; but not less than 0.43.
NOTE 3. {3 is the ratio for the smaller end moment to the larger end moment on a span equal to the unrestrained length.

4.3.7.7 Equal flanged rolled sections. This clause gives a When using table 19 the effect of the loads and moments
conservative approach. If a full analysis is required or the between restraints may be considered by multiplying the
sections are equal flanged rolled sections, then the provisions effective length by the slenderness correction factor n.
of 4.3.7.1 to 4.3.7.6 should be used. Reference may be made to 4.3.7.6 for value of n. Altern-
In each length between lateral restraints, the maximum atively, except for destabilizing loads (see 4.3.4), n may be
moment should not exceed the buckling resistance moment, taken from table 20.
Mb, of the section taken as pbS x.
Where 4.3.8 Buck! ing resistance moment for single angles
The buckling resistance moment for a single angle should be
pb is determined from table 19(a), (b), (c) or (d), for "A
taken as:
and x;
Mb = O.BpyZ for Llrw.;;;;; 100
Sx is the plastic modulus of the section about the x-x
axis; Mb = 0.7pyZfor Llrw.;;;;; 180
A is the slenderness of section= LE/r; Mb = 0.6pyZ for Llrvv.;;;;; 300
L E is the effective length from 4.3.5 or 4.3.6, where
r is the radius of gyration about the member minor Z is the smaller elastic modulus about the appropriate
axis; axis;
x is the torsional index (see 4.3.7.5) which may be rvv is the radius of gyration about the weakest axis;
taken as D!T. L is the unrestrained length.

31
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

Table 19. Bending strength,Pb. (in N/mm 2 ) for rolled sections with equal flanges
(a) Pv = 265 N/mm 2

~ 30
5

265
10

265
15

265
20

265
25

265
30

265
35

265
40

265
45

265
50

265
35 265 265 265 265 265 265 265 265 265 265
40 265 265 265 265 265 264 264 264 263 263
45 265 265 261 258 256 255 254 254 254 254
50 265 261 253 249 247 246 245 244 244 244

55 265 255 246 241 238 236 235 235 234 234
60 265 250 239 233 229 227 226 225 224 224
65 265 245 232 225 221 218 216 215 214 214
70 265 240 225 217 212 209 207 205 204 204
75 263 235 219 210 204 200 198 196 195 194

80 260 230 213 202 196 191 189 187 185 184
85 257 226 207 195 188 183 180 178 176 175
90 254 222 201 188 180 175 171 169 167 166
95 252 217 196 182 173 167 163 160 158 157
100 249 213 190 176 166 160 156 153 150 149

105 247 209 185 170 160 153 148 145 143 141
110 244 206 180 164 154 147 142 138 136 134
115 242 202 176 159 148 140 135 132 129 127
120 240 198 171 154 142 135 129 125 123 121
125 237 195 167 149 137 129 124 120 117 115

130 235 191 163 144 132 124 119 114 111 109
135 233 188 159 140 128 119 114 109 106 104
140 231 185 155 136 124 115 109 105 102 99
145 229 182 152 132 120 111 105 101 97 95
150 227 179 148 129 116 107 101 97 93 91

155 225 176 145 125 112 103 97 93 89 87

160 223 173 142 122 109 100 94 89 86 83
165 221 170 139 119 106 97 91 86 83 80
170 219 167 136 116 103 94 88 83 80 77
175 217 165 133 113 100 91 85 80 77 74

180 215 162 130 110 97 88 82 77 74 71

185 213 160 128 108 95 86 79 75 71 69
190 211 157 125 105 92 83 77 73 69 66
195 209 155 123 103 90 81 75 70 67 64
200 207 153 120 101 88 79 73 68 65 62

210 204 148 116 96 84 75 69 64 61 58

220 200 144 112 93 80 71 65 61 58 55
230 197 140 108 89 77 68 62 58 54 52
240 194 136 104 86 74 65 59 55 52 49
250 190 132 101 83 71 63 57 52 49 47

32
 BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section four

Table 19 (continued)
(b) Pv = 275 N/mm 2

~30
5

275
10

275
15

275
20

275
25

275
30

275
35

275
40

275
45

275
50

275
35 275 275 275 275 275 275 275 275 275 275
40 275 275 275 275 274 273 272 272 272 272
45 275 275 269 266 264 263 263 262 262 262
50 275 269 261 257 255 253 253 252 252 251

55 275 263 254 248 246 244 243 242 241 241
60 275 258 246 240 236 234 233 232 231 230
65 275 252 239 232 227 224 223 221 221 220
70 274 247 232 223 218 215 213 211 210 209
75 271 242 225 215 209 206 203 201 200 199

80 268 237 219 208 201 196 193 191 190 189
85 265 233 213 200 193 188 184 182 180 179
90 262 228 207 193 185 179 175 173 171 169
95 260 224 201 186 177 171 167 164 162 160
100 257 219 195 180 170 164 159 156 153 152

105 254 215 190 174 163 156 151 148 146 144
110 252 211 185 168 157 150 144 141 138 136
115 250 207 180 162 151 143 138 134 131 129
120 247 204 175 157 145 137 132 128 125 123
125 245 200 171 152 140 132 126 122 119 116

130 242 196 167 147 135 126 120 116 113 111
135 240 193 162 143 130 121 115 111 108 106
140 238 190 159 139 126 117 111 106 103 101
145 236 186 155 135 122 113 106 102 99 96
150 233 183 151 131 118 109 102 98 95 92

155 231 180 148 127 114 105 99 94 91 88

130 229 177 144 124 111 101 95 90 87 84
165 227 174 141 121 107 98 92 87 84 81
170 225 171 138 118 104 95 89 84 81 78
175 223 169 135 115 101 92 86 81 78 75

180 221 166 133 112 99 89 83 78 75 72

185 219 163 130 109 96 87 80 76 72 70
190 217 161 127 107 93 84 78 73 70 67
195 215 158 125 104 91 82 76 71 68 65
200 213 156 122 102 89 80 74 69 65 63

210 209 151 118 98 85 76 70 65 62 59

220 206 147 114 94 81 72 66 62 58 55
230 202 143 110 90 78 69 63 58 55 52
240 199 139 106 87 74 66 60 56 52 50
250 195 135 103 84 72 63 57 53 50 47

33
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section four

Table 19 (continued)

(c) Py = 340 N/mm 2

I~30
5

340
10

340
15

340
20

340
25

340
30

340
35

340
40

340
45

340
50

340
35 340 340 340 340 340 340 339 339 339 339
40 340 333 333 320 328 327 327 326 326 326
45 340 333 323 318 316 315 314 314 313 313
50 340 322 312 307 304 302 301 301 300 300

55 340 315 303 296 292 290 288 287 286 286
60 337 308 293 285 280 277 275 274 273 272
65 333 301 283 273 268 264 262 260 259 258
70 329 294 274 263 256 251 248 246 245 244
75 325 287 265 252 244 239 235 233 231 230

80 321 281 257 242 232 227 223 220 218 216
85 318 275 248 232 222 215 211 207 205 203
90 214 269 240 223 211 204 199 196 193 191
95 31-1 263 232 213 201 194 188 185 182 180
100 307 257 225 205 192 184 178 174 171 169

105 304 252 218 197 184 175 169 165 161 159
110 301 246 211 189 176 166 160 156 152 150
115 297 241 205 182 168 159 152 147 144 142
120 294 236 199 176 161 151 145 140 136 134
125 291 231 193 170 155 145 138 133 129 127

130 288 227 188 164 148 138 131 126 123 120
135 285 222 183 158 143 133 125 120 117 114
140 282 218 178 153 138 127 120 115 111 108
145 279 213 173 148 133 122 115 110 106 103
150 276 209 168 144 128 118 110 105 101 99

155 273 205 164 139 124 113 106 101 97 94

160 270 207 1.60 135 120 109 102 97 93 90
165 267 197 156 132 116 106 98 93 89 86
170 265 194 153 128 112 102 95 90 86 83
175 262 190 149 125 109 99 92 86 82 79

180 259 187 146 121 106 96 88 83 79 76

185 257 184 142 118 103 93 86 80 77 74
190 254 180 139 115 100 90 83 78 74 71
195 251 177 136 113 98 87 80 75 71 68
200 249 174 134 110 95 85 78 73 69 66

210 244 168 128 105 90 81 74 69 65 62

220 239 163 123 101 86 77 70 65 61 58
230 234 158 119 96 82 73 66 61 58 55
240 230 153 115 93 79 70 63 58 55 52
250 225 149 111 89 76 67 60 56 52 49

34
 BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section four

Table 19 (concluded)

(d) Py = 355 N/mm 2

~30
5

355
10

355
15

355
20

355
25

355
30

355
35

355
40

355
46

355
60

355
35 355 355 355 354 353 353 352 352 352 352
40 355 352 346 342 341 340 339 339 339 338
45 355 344 335 320 328 327 326 325 325 325
50 355 335 324 318 315 313 312 311 311 311

55 354 327 314 306 302 300 298 297 297 296
60 350 319 303 294 289 286 284 283 282 281
65 346 312 293 283 276 273 270 268 267 266
70 341 305 283 271 264 259 256 254 252 251
75 337 298 274 260 251 246 242 240 238 236

80 333 291 265 249 239 233 229 226 224 222
85 329 284 256 238 228 221 216 213 210 209
90 326 278 247 228 217 209 204 200 198 196
95 322 271 239 219 206 198 193 189 186 184
100 318 265 231 210 197 188 182 178 175 173

105 315 260 224 202 188 178 172 168 165 162
110 311 254 217 194 179 170 163 159 155 153
115 308 248 210 186 171 162 155 150 147 144
120 305 243 204 180 164 154 147 142 139 136
125 301 238 198 173 157 147 140 135 131 129

130 298 233 192 167 151 141 133 128 125 122
135 295 228 187 161 145 135 127 122 118 116
140 292 223 181 156 140 129 122 117 113 110
145 288 219 176 151 135 124 117 111 108 105
150 285 214 172 146 130 119 112 107 103 100

155 282 210 167 142 126 115 107 102 98 95

160 279 206 163 138 121 111 103 98 94 91
165 276 202 159 134 118 107 100 94 90 87
170 273 198 155 130 114 103 96 91 87 84
175 270 195 152 126 111 100 93 87 83 so
180 268 191 148 123 107 97 89 84 80 77
185 265 188 145 120 104 94 87 81 77 74
190 262 184 142 117 101 91 84 79 75 72
195 259 181 139 114 99 88 81 76 72 69
200 257 178 136 111 96 86 79 74 70 67

210 251 172 130 106 91 81 74 69 65 62

220 246 166 125 102 87 77 70 65 62 59
230 241 161 121 98 83 74 67 62 58 55
240 236 156 116 94 80 70 64 59 55 52
250 231 151 112 90 77 67 61 56 52 50

35
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section four

Table 20. Slenderness correction factor, n, for standard load

conditions
Load conditions Banding moment
n
diagram bet-n lateral
restraints

{H H' I I
1.0

0.77
(H
l ~ ~
{H HJ ~ 0.65

~ t ~
iw 0.86

f ~ ~
w 0.94
fz z z z z z z z z z z z '
~

&J ~
0.94

'\ /
trdw t ~
0.94

NOTE 1. For other load conditions, n may be obtained from tables 15

or 16.
NOTE 2. For destabilizing loads (see 4.3.4), n should be taken as 1.0.

4.4 Plate girders 4.4.2.2 Minimum web thickness for serviceability.

For serviceability:
4.4.1 General
d
The relevant conditions in 4.2 and 4.3 should be satisfied. (a) Without intermediate stiffeners: t;;..
250
4.4.2 Dimensions of webs and flanges (b) With transverse stiffeners only:
4.4.2.1 General. Reference should be made to 3.5 for d
classification of sections. (1 ) where stiffener spacing a > d: t ;;.. - -
250
The thickness of webs should comply with both 4.4.2.2
and 4.4.2.3. (2) where stiffener spacing a.;;;;; d: t;;.. ..!!_ (~) 112
250 d
(c) With longitudinal stiffeners: as given in BS 5400.

36

4.4.2.3 Minimum web thickness to avoid flange buckling.
In order to avoid the flange buckling into the web:
(a) Without intermediate stiffeners: t;;;;;. 2: 0 (;~~)
(b) With intermediate transverse stiffeners:
(1) where stiffener spacing a> 1.5d: t;;;;;. ("yf )
d
250 345
(2) where stiffener spacing 1.5d: t;;;;;.
a~
(Pyt)
d
112
250 455
where Pvt is the design strength of the compression flange.
4.4.3 Design strength of components
The design strength should be obtained from 3.1.1.
For hybrid girders due account should be taken of the
variation in design strength between the component parts.
4.4.4 Moment capacity
4.4.4.1 General. The moment capacity for a section with
webs where d/t < 63e should be determined in accordance
with 4.2.5 and 4.2.6.
4.4.4.2 Sections with thin or slender webs. Where the
flanges of a section are plastic, compact or semi-compact,
but the web is thin (i.e. d/t;;;;;. 63€) or slender (see table 7),
the moment capacity should be calculated using one of the
following methods.
(a) The moment and axial load may be assumed to be
resisted by the flanges alone (each flange being assumed
to be subject to uniform stress Pv) and the web designed
for shear only, see 4.4.5.
(b) The moment and axial load may be assumed to be
resisted by the whole section, the web being designed for
combined shear and longitudinal stresses, see H.3.
For a section with semi-compact flanges the moment in
the web should be determined from simple elastic theory.
For a section with plastic or compact flanges, simple
plastic theory may be used.
(c) A proportion of the loading may be assumed to be
resisted by method (b), the remainder of the loading
being resisted by method (a) and the web designed
accordingly.
4.4.4.3 Sections with slender flanges. The moment capacity
should be calculated from the reduced stress as given in 3.6.
4.4.5 Shear buckling resistance of thin webs
4.4.5.1 General. This clause applies to webs which are
assumed to carry shear only, axial load and bending
moment being carried entirely by the flanges. For webs
carrying shear and direct stress, see H.3.
Webs without intermediate stiffeners should be designed
according to 4.4.5.3.
Webs with intermediate stiffeners may be designed according
to 4.4.5.3 or 4.4.5.4.
Webs with longitudinal stiffeners should be designed to
BS 5400.
37
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four
4.4.5.2 Design of internal and end panels. Internal panels
may be designed using tension field action and the end
panels designed accordingly. Alternatively internal and end
panels may be designed simply (but conservatively) without
using tension field action.
4.4.5.3 Design without using tension field action.
This clause should be used for the design of unstiffened
girders and may be used (conservatively) for the design of
internal and end panels of a stiffened girder.
The shear buckling resistance, Vcr• of a stiffened or
unstiffened panel is given by:
Vcr = Qcrdt
where
qcr is the critical shear strength as obtained from
tables 21 (a) to (d) as appropriate. For girders
without intermediate stiffeners the spacing should be
taken as infinity;
d is the depth of the web;
t is the thickness of the web.
4.4.5.4 Design using tension field action
4.4.5.4.1 General. This clause may be used for the design
of internal and end panels providing the end panels are
designed according to 4.4.5.4.2 or 4.4.5.4.3 as appropriate.
The shear buckling resistance of a stiffened panel is given
by:
vb = qbdt
If the flanges in the panel are not fully stressed the shear
resistance may be increased to:
Vb = (qb + Qt v'Ktl dt but~ 0.6pydt
where
qb is the basic shear strength as obtained from
tables 22(a) to (d) as appropriate;
q1 is the flange dependent shear strength factor
obtained from tables 23(a) to (d) as appropriate;
d is the depth of the web;
t is the thickness of the web;
;;:w (1 - p:J ;
Kt = 4
Mpt is the plastic moment capacity of the smaller flange
about its own equal area axis parallel to the flange;
f is the mean longitudinal stress in the smaller flange
due to moment and/or axial load;
Pyt is the design strength of the flange;
Mpw is the plastic moment capacity of the web about its
own equal area axis perpendicular to the web.
4.4.5.4.2 End panels designed not using tension field
action (see figure 5). This clause may be used for the design
of end panels in girders designed using tension field action.
In this case the end panel should be designed according
to 4.4.5.3.
Additionally they should be checked as a beam spanning
between the flanges of the girder capable of resisting a shear
force Rtt and a moment Mtt as given in 4.4.5.4.4.
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

The end stiffener should be capable of resisting the reaction

plus a compressive force due to the moment Mtt.
4.4.5.4.3 End panels designed using tension field action
(see figures 6 and 7). This clause may be used for the design
of end panels in girders designed using tension field action.
where
In this case the end panel should be designed according
q cr 1/2
to 4.4.5.4.1. (1 )
Additionally it should be provided with an end post con- 0.6py
sisting of a single or double stiffener, see figures 6 and 7, d is the web depth;
satisfying the following. t is the web thickness;
(a) Single stiffener, see figure 6. The top of the end post
fv is the applied shear stress in the panel utilizing
should be rigidly connected to the flange using full
tension field action;
strength welds.
qb is the basic shear strength of the panel utilizing
The end post should be capable of resisting the reaction
tension field action;
plus a moment from the anchor forces equal to 2/ 3 Mtt;
where Mtt is obtained from 4.4.5.4.4. qcr is the critical shear strength for the panel designed
utilizing tension field action;
The width and thickness of the end post are not to
fv, qb and qcr are for the panel designed utilizing tension
exceed the width and thickness of the flange.
field action, i.e. panel A in figure 5 and panel 8 in figures 6
(b) Double stiffener, see figure 7. The end post should and 7.
be checked as a beam spanning between the flanges of
the girder capable of resisting a shear force Rtf and a If fv < qb then the value of Hq may be multiplied by the
moment Mtt due to the anchor forces as given in 4.4.5.4.4. ratio:
fv - qcr
4.4.5.4.4 Anchor force. The resultant longitudinal shear
force Rtf and moment Mtf due to the anchor force Hq qb- qcr
should be obtained from the following: 4.4.5.5 Panels with openings. Panels with an opening with
any dimension greater than 10% of the minimum panel
dimension should be designed without using tension field
action (see 4.4.5.3). The adjacent panels should be designed
as an end panel as given in 4.4.5.4.2 or 4.4.5.4.3 as
appropriate.
In addition reference should be made to 4.15.

Panel B Panel A
Bearing
stiffener

v
~
L<

Panel A: designed utilizing tension field action.

Panel 8: designed without utilizing tension field action and for longitudinal shear Rtf and moment
Mtt (see 4.4.5.4.4).
Bearing stiffener: designed for the compressive force due to bearing plus the compression due to the
momentMtf·

Figure 5. End panel designed not using tension field action

38
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

Bearing Panel B Panel A

stiffener and
end post

r:;~
Panel A: designed utilizing tension field action.
Panel B: designed utilizing tension field action.
Bearing stiffener and end post: designed for combination of compressive loads due to bearing and a
moment equal to 2/ 3 Mtt.

Figure 6. End panel designed using tension field action (single stiffener)

End post

( ')

Bearing
stiffener
Panel B Panel A

vvv
L...l

Panel A: designed utilizing tension field action.

Panel B: designed utilizing tension field action.
Bearing stiffener: designed for compressive force due to bearing.
End post: designed for horizontal shear Rtf and moment Mtf·

Figure 7. End panel designed using tension field action (double stiffener)

39
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section four

Table 21. Critical shear strength, qcr (in N/mm 2 )

(a) Grade 43 steel (Pv = 265 N/mm 2 )

Stiffener spacing ratio a/d

d/t 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 12 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 ~

55 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159
60 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159
65 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 157
70 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 158 155 153 148
75 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 158 155 152 150 147 145 140

80 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 157 152 148 145 143 140 137 132
85 159 159 159 159 159 159 158 150 145 141 138 136 132 130 124
90 159 159 159 159 159 158 152 144 138 134 131 128 124 122 116
95 1bl-J 159 159 159 159 153 146 137 131 127 123 121 117 114 108
100 159 159 159 159 155 147 140 131 124 120 116 114 109 107 100

105 159 159 159 159 150 141 133 124 118 113 109 106 102 98 91
110 159 159 159 155 145 136 127 118 111 106 102 98 93 90 83
115 159 159 159 150 139 130 121 111 104 98 93 90 85 82 76
120 159 159 158 146 134 124 115 105 96 90 86 82 78 75 69
125 159 159 154 141 129 118 109 97 88 83 79 76 72 69 64

130 159 159 150 136 124 113 103 90 82 77 73 70 66 64 59

135 159 159 145 131 118 107 96 83 76 71 68 65 61 59 55
140 159 158 141 126 113 101 89 78 71 66 63 61 57 55 51
145 159 154 137 122 108 94 83 72 66 61 59 56 53 52 48
150 159 150 133 117 103 88 78 68 61 57 55 53 50 48 44

155 159 147 128 112 96 83 73 63 58 54 51 49 47 45 42

160 159 143 124 107 90 78 68 59 54 51 48 46 44 42 39
165 159 139 120 102 85 73 64 56 51 47 46 44 41 40 37
170 158 136 116 97 80 69 61 53 48 45 43 41 39 37 35
175 155 132 111 91 76 65 57 50 45 42 40 39 37 35 33

180 152 128 107 86 71 61 54 47 43 40 38 37 35 33 31

185 149 125 103 82 68 58 51 44 40 38 36 35 33 32 29
190 146 121 98 77 64 55 48 42 38 36 34 33 31 30 28
195 143 117 93 73 61 52 46 40 36 34 32 31 29 28 26
200 140 114 88 70 58 50 44 38 35 32 31 30 28 27 25

205 136 110 84 66 55 47 42 36 33 31 29 28 27 26 24

210 133 106 80 63 52 45 40 34 . 31 29 28 27 25 25 23
215 130 103 76 60 50 43 38 33 30 28 27 26 24 23 22
220 127 98 73 58 48 41 36 31 29 27 25 25 23 22 21
225 124 94 70 55 46 39 35 30 27 26 24 23 22 21 20

230 121 90 67 53 44 38 33 29 26 24 23 22 21 20 19
235 118 86 64 51 42 36 32 28 25 23 22 22 20 20 18
240 115 82 61 48 40 34 30 26 24 22 21 21 19 19 17
245 112 79 59 46 39 33 29 25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
250 109 76 56 45 37 32 28 24 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

40
 BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section four

Table 21 (continued)

(b) Grade 43 steel (Pv = 275 N/mm 2 )

Stiffener spacing ratio a/d

d/t 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 12 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 3.0
..
55 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165
60 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165
65 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 160
70 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 164 162 158 157 152
75 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 162 159 156 154 150 148 143

80 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 161 155 151 148 146 142 140 135
85 165 165 165 165 165 165 162 154 148 144 141 138 134 132 126
90 165 165 165 165 165 162 155 147 141 136 133 131 126 124 118
95 165 165 165 165 165 156 149 140 134 129 125 123 118 116 110
100 165 165 165 165 159 150- 142 133 126 121 118 115 110 108 100

105 165 165 165 164 154 144 136 126 119 114 110 107 102 98 91
110 165 165 165 159 148 138 130 119 112 107 102 98 93 90 83
115 165 165 165 154 142 132 123 112 105 98 93 90 85 82 76
120 165 165 162 149 137 126 117 106 96 90 86 82 78 75 69
125 165 165 158 144 131 120 110 97 88 83 79 76 72 69 64

130 165 165 153 139 126 114 104 90 82 77 73 70 66 64 59

135 165 165 149 134 120 108 96 83 76 71 68 65 61 59 55
140 165 162 144 129 114 101 89 78 71 66 63 61 57 55 51
145 165 158 140 123 109 94 83 72 66 61 59 56 53 52 48
150 165 154 135 118 103 88 78 68 61 57 55 53 50 48 44

155 165 150 131 113 96 83 73 63 58 54 51 49 47 45 42

160 165 146 126 108 90 78 68 59 54 51 48 46 44 42 39
165 165 142 122 103 85 73 64 56 51 47 45 44 41 40 37
170 162 138 117 97 80 69 61 53 48 45 43 41 39 37 35
175 158 134 113 91 76 65 57 50 45 42 40 39 37 35 33

180 155 131 108 86 71 61 54 47 43 40 38 37 35 33 31

185 152 127 103 82 68 58 51 44 40 38 36 35 33 32 29
190 149 123 98 77 64 55 48 42 38 36 34 33 31 30 28
195 146 119 93 73 61 52 46 40 36 34 32 31 29 28 26
200 142 115 88 70 58 50 44 38 35 32 31 30 28 27 25

205 139 111 84 66 55 47 42 36 33 31 29 28 27 26 24

210 136 107 80 63 52 45 40 34 31 29 28 27 25 25 23
215 133 103 76 60 50 43 38 33 30 28 27 26 24 23 22
220 130 98 73 58 48 41 36 31 29 27 25 25 23 22 21
225 126 94 70 55 46 39 35 30 27 26 24 23 22 21 20

230 123 90 67 53 44 38 33 29 26 24 23 22 21 20 19
235 120 86 64 51 42 36 32 28 25 23 22 22 20 20 18
240 117 82 61 48 40 34 30 26 24 22 21 21 19 18 17
245 114 79 59 46 39 33 29 25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
250 110 76 56 45 37 32 28 24 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

41
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

Table 21 (continued)

(c) Grade 50 steel (py = 340 N/mm 2 )

Stiffener spacing ratio aid

dlt 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 -
55 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204
60 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 202 195
65 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 201 198 196 191 189 183
70 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 202 196 191 188 185 180 178 171
75 204 204 204 204 204 204 202 193 186 181 177 174 169 167 160

80 204 204 204 204 204 202 194 183 176 171 167 163 158 155 148
85 204 204 204 204 204 194 185 174 166 160 156 153 147 144 136
90 204 204 204 204 197 186 176 164 156 150 146 142 136 133 123
95 204 204 204 202 189 177 167 155 146 140 135 131 124 120 111
100 204 204 204 195 181 169 158 146 136 129 123 119 112 108 100

105 204 204 204 188 174 161 150 136 125 117 112 108 102 98 91
110 204 204 198 181 166 153 141 126 114 107 102 98 93 90 83
115 204 204 192 174 158 144 132 115 105 98 93 90 85 82 76
120 204 204 186 167 151 136 122 106 96 90 86 82 78 75 69
125 204 201 179 160 143 127 112 97 88 83 79 76 72 69 64

130 204 196 173 153 135 117 104 90 82 77 73 70 66 64 59

135 204 190 167 146 127 109 96 83 76 71 68 65 61 59 55
140 204 185 161 139 118 101 89 78 71 66 63 61 57 55 51
145 204 179 155 132 110 94 83 72 66 61 59 56 53 52 48
150 202 174 148 124 103 88 78 68 61 57 55 53 50 48 44

155 198 169 142 116 96 83 73 63 58 54 51 49 47 45 42

160 194 163 136 109 90 78 68 59 54 51 48 46 44 42 39
165 189 158 130 103 85 73 64 56 51 47 45 44 41 40 37
170 185 153 122 97 80 69 61 53 48 45 43 41 39 37 35
175 180 147 115 91 76 65 57 50 45 42 40 39 37 35 33

180 176 142 109 86 71 61 54 47 43 40 38 37 35 33 31

185 172 137 103 82 68 58 51 44 40 38 36 35 33 32 29
190 167 131 98 77 64 55 48 42 38 36 34 33 31 30 28
195 163 125 93 73 61 52 46 40 36 34 32 31 29 28 26
200 158 119 88 70 58 50 44 38 35 32 31 30 28 27 25

205 154 113 84 66 55 47 42 36 33 31 29 28 27 26 24

210 150 108 80 63 52 45 40 34 31 29 28 27 25 25 23
215 145 103 76 60 50 43 38 33 30 28 27 26 24 23 22
220 141 98 73 58 48 41 36 31 29 27 25 25 23 22 21
225 136 94 70 55 46 39 35 30 27 26 24 23 22 21 20

230 132 90 67 53 44 38 33 29 26 24 23 22 21 20 19
235 127 86 64 51 42 36 32 28 25 23 22 22 20 20 18
240 122 82 61 48 40 34 30 26 24 22 21 21 19 19 17
245 117 79 59 46 39 33 29 25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
250 112 76 56 45 37 32 28 24 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

42
 BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section four

Table 21 (concluded)

(d) Grade 50 steel (pv = 355 N/mm 2 )

Stiffener spacing ratio aid

dlt 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 ~

55 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213
60 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 212 208 206 200
65 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 212 207 204 201 197 194 188
70 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 208 201 196 192 190 185 182 175
75 213 213 213 213 213 213 208 198 191 185 181 178 173 170 163

80 213 213 213 213 213 208 199 188 180 174 170 167 161 158 150
85 213 213 213 213 210 199 190 178 170 163 159 155 150 146 138
90 213 213 213 213 202 190 180 168 159 152 148 144 138 134 123
95 213 213 213 208 194 182 171 158 148 142 136 132 124 120 111
100 213 213 213 200 186 173 161 148 138 129 123 119 112 108 100

105 213 213 210 193 178 164 152 138 125 117 112 108 102 98 91
110 213 213 204 186 169 155 143 126 114 107 102 98 93 90 83
115 213 213 197 178 161 146 132 115 105 98 93 90 85 82 76
120 213 212 190 171 153 137 122 106 96 90 86 82 78 75 69
125 213 207 184 163 145 127 112 97 88 83 79 76 72 69 64

130 213 201 177 156 137 117 104 90 82 77 73 70 66 64 59

135 213 195 171 148 127 109 96 83 76 71 68 65 61 59 55
140 213 190 164 141 118 101 89 78 71 66 63 61 57 55 51
145 213 184 157 133 110 94 83 72 66 61 59 56 53 52 48
150 208 178 151 124 103 88 78 68 61 57 55 53 50 48 44

155 204 172 144 116 96 83 73 63 58 54 51 49 47 45 42

160 199 167 137 109 90 78 68 59 54 51 48 46 44 42 39
165 194 161 130 103 85 73 64 56 51 47 45 44 41 40 37
170 190 155 122 97 80 69 61 53 48 45 43 41 39 37 35
175 185 150 115 91 76 65 57 50 45 42 40 39 37 35 33

180 180 144 109 86 71 61 54 47 43 40 38 37 35 33 31

185 175 138 103 82 68 58 51 44 40 38 36 35 33 32 29
190 171 132 98 77 64 55 48 42 38 36 34 33 31 30 28
195 166 125 93 73 61 52 46 40 36 34 32 31 29 28 26
200 161 119 88 70 58 50 44 38 35 32 31 30 28 27 25

205 157 113 84 66 55 47 42 36 33 31 29 28 27 26 24

210 152 108 80 63 52 45 40 34 31 29 28 27 25 25 23
215 147 103 76 60 50 43 38 33 30 28 27 26 24 23 22
220 143 98 73 58 48 41 36 31 29 27 25 25 23 22 21
225 138 94 70 55 46 39 35 30 27 26 24 23 22 21 20

230 132 90 67 53 44 38 33 29 26 24 23 22 21 20 19
235 127 86 64 51 42 36 32 28 25 23 22 22 20 20 18
240 122 82 61 48 40 34 30 26 24 22 21 21 19 19 17
245 117 79 59 46 39 33 29 25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
250 112 76 56 45 37 32 28 24 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

43
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section four

Table 22. Basic shear strength, qb (in N/mm 2 )

(a) Grade 43 steel <Pv = 265 N/mm 2 )

Stiffener spacing ratio a/d

d/t 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 12 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 3.0

55 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159
60 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159
65 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159
70 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159
75 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 150 148

80 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 151 149 148 145 143
85 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 149 147 145 143 140 137
90 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 149 145 142 140 138 134 131
95 159 159 159 159 159 159 150 145 141 138 135 133 128 125
100 159 159 159 159 159 150 147 142 137 133 130 127 122 119

105 159 159 159 159 159 148 144 138 133 129 125 122 116 111
110 159 159 159 159 150 145 141 134 128 124 120 116 109 104
115 159 159 159 159 147 142 137 130 124 118 113 109 102 97
120 159 159 159 159 145 140 134 126 118 112 107 103 96 91
125 159 159 159 148 143 137 131 121 113 107 102 98 91 86

130 159 159 159 146 140 133 127 116 108 102 97 93 86 81
135 159 159 150 144 137 130 123 112 104 97 93 89 82 77
140 159 159 149 142 135 127 118 108 100 94 89 85 78 73
145 159 159 147 140 132 123 114 104 96 90 85 81 75 70
150 159 159 145 138 129 119 111 100 93 87 82 78 71 67

155 159 151 144 135 126 116 108 97 90 84 79 75 69 64

160 159 150 142 133 122 113 105 94 87 81 76 73 66 61
165 159 149 140 130 119 110 102 92 84 79 74 70 64 59
170 159 147 138 127 116 107 99 89 82 76 72 68 61 57
175 159 146 136 125 114 105 97 87 80 74 70 66 59 55

180 159 145 134 122 111 102 95 85 78 72 68 64 58 53

185 159 143 132 119 109 100 93 83 76 71 66 63 56 52
190 151 142 130 117 107 98 91 82 74 69 65 61 54 50
195 150 140 128 115 105 96 89 80 73 67 63 59 53 49
200 149 139 125 113 103 94 88 78 71 66 62 58 52 47

205 148 137 123 111 101 93 86 77 70 65 60 57 50 46

210 147 136 121 109 99 91 85 76 69 63 59 56 49 45
215 146 134 119 107 98 90 83 74 68 62 58 55 48 44
220 145 132 117 106 96 89 82 73 66 61 57 54 47 43
225 144 130 116 104 95 87 81 72 65 60 56 53 46 42

230 143 129 114 103 94 86 80 71 64 59 55 52 45 41

235 142 127 113 101 92 85 79 70 64 58 54 51 45 40
240 141 125 111 100 91 84 78 69 63 58 53 50 44 39
245 140 124 110 99 90 83 77 68 62 57 53 49 43 39
250 139 122 109 98 89 82 76 68 61 56 52 49 42 38

44
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

Table 22 (continued)

(b) Grade 43 steel IPv = 275 N/mm 2 )

Stiffener spacing ratio a/d

d/t 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 12 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 3.0

55 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165
60 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165
65 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165
70 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165
75 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 156 154 152

80 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 155 153 152 149 147
85 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 156 153 151 149 147 143 140
90 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 153 149 146 144 141 137 134
95 165 165 165 165 165 165 154 149 145 142 138 136 131 127
100 165 165 165 165 165 155 151 146 141 137 133 130 124 120

105 165 165 165 165 157 152 148 142 136 131 127 124 117 112
110 165 165 165 165 154 150 145 137 131 126 121 117 110 105
115 165 165 165 165 152 147 141 133 126 120 114 110 103 98
120 165 165 165 155 149 143 137 129 120 114 109 104 97 92
125 165 165 165 153 147 140 134 123 115 108 103 99 92 87

130 165 165 165 151 144 137 130 118 110 103 98 94 87 82
135 165 165 155 148 141 134 125 114 105 99 94 90 83 78
140 165 165 153 146 138 130 121 110 101 95 90 86 79 74
145 165 165 152 144 135 125 117 106 98 92 87 83 76 71
150 165 165 150 141 132 122 113 102 94 88 83 79 72 68

155 165 156 148 139 128 118 110 99 91 85 80 77 70 65

160 165 155 146 136 125 115 107 96 89 83 78 74 67 62
165 165 153 144 133 122 112 104 94 86 80 75 72 65 60
170 165 152 142 130 119 109 102 91 84 78 73 69 62 58
175 165 150 140 127 116 107 99 89 82 76 71 67 60 56

180 165 149 138 125 114 105 97 87 80 74 69 65 59 54

185 165 148 136 122 111 102 95 85 78 72 67 64 57 52
190 156 146 133 120 109 100 93 83 76 70 66 62 55 51
195 155 144 131 118 107 99 91 82 74 69 64 61 54 49
200 154 143 128 116 105 97 90 80 73 67 63 59 53 48

205 153 141 126 114 103 95 88 79 72 66 62 58 51 47

210 152 140 124 112 102 94 87 77 70 65 60 57 50 46
215 151 138 122 110 100 92 85 76 69 64 59 56 49 45
220 150 136 120 108 99 91 84 75 68 63 58 55 48 44
225 149 134 119 107 97 90 83 74 67 62 57 54 47 43

230 148 132 117 105 96 88 82 73 66 61 56 53 46 42

235 147 130 116 104 95 87 81 72 65 60 56 52 45 41
240 145 129 114 103 94 86 80 71 64 59 55 51 45 40
245 144 127 113 102 93 85 79 70 64 58 54 50 44 40
250 143 125 112 101 92 84 78 69 63 57 53 50 43 39

45
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

Table 22 (continued)

(c) Grade 50 steel (Pv = 340 N/mm 2 )

Stiffener spacing ratio a/d

dlt 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 12 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 3.0

55 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204
60 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204
65 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 194 192
70 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 194 192 190 187 184
75 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 191 188 186 183 179 176

80 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 190 186 182 179 176 171 167
85 204 204 204 204 204 204 191 185 180 176 172 169 162 158
90 204 204 204 204 204 192 187 180 174 169 164 161 154 149
95 204 204 204 204 193 188 183 174 167 162 157 153 144 138
100 204 204 204 204 190 184 178 169 161 154 148 143 134 128

105 204 204 204 193 187 180 173 163 153 145 139 134 125 119
110 204 204 204 190 183 176 168 156 145 137 131 126 117 111
115 204 204 204 187 179 171 163 149 138 130 124 119 110 104
120 204 204 193 184 176 166 156 142 132 124 118 113 104 98
125 204 204 190 181 172 161 150 136 126 119 112 107 99 93

130 204 204 188 178 168 156 145 131 121 114 107 103 94 88
135 204 204 185 175 163 150 140 127 117 109 103 98 89 84
140 204 193 183 171 158 146 135 122 112 105 99 94 86 80
145 204 191 180 168 153 141 131 118 109 101 95 91 82 76
150 204 189 177 164 149 137 128 115 105 98 92 87 79 73

155 204 187 175 159 145 134 124 112 102 95 89 85 76 70
160 204 185 172 156 142 130 121 109 99 92 87 82 73 68
165 204 183 169 152 138 127 118 106 97 90 84 79 71 65
170 193 181 165 149 135 125 116 103 94 87 82 77 69 63
175 192 179 162 146 133 122 113 101 92 85 80 75 67 61

180 190 177 159 143 130 120 111 99 90 83 78 73 65 59

185 189 174 156 140 128 117 109 97 88 82 76 72 63 58
190 188 172 153 138 125 115 107 95 87 80 74 70 62 56
195 186 169 150 135 123 113 105 94 85 78 73 68 60 55
200 185 167 148 133 121 112 103 92 84 77 71 67 59 53

205 183 164 146 131 119 110 102 91 82 76 70 66 58 52

210 182 162 143 129 118 109 100 89 81 74 69 65 57 51
215 180 159 141 127 116 107 99 88 80 73 68 63 55 50
220 179 157 140 126 115 106 98 87 79 72 67 62 54 49
225 177 155 138 124 113 104 97 86 78 71 66 61 53 48

230 175 153 136 123 112 103 96 85 77 70 65 61 53 47

235 173 151 135 121 111 102 95 84 76 69 64 60 52 46
240 171 150 133 120 110 101 94 83 75 68 63 59 51 46
245 169 148 132 119 109 100 93 82 74 68 62 58 50 45
250 167 146 130 118 108 99 92 81 73 67 62 57 50 44

46
 BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section four

Table 22 (concluded)

(d) Grade 50 steel (py = 355 N/mm 2 )

Stiffener spacing ratio a/d

d/t 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 3.0

55 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213
60 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213
65 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 200 198
70 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 201 198 196 193 190
75 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 202 198 194 192 189 184 181

80 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 197 192 188 184 181 175 171
85 213 213 213 213 213 213 198 191 186 181 177 173 166 162
90 213 213 213 213 213 199 193 186 179 173 169 164 157 151
95 213 213 213 213 201 195 189 180 172 166 160 155 145 139
100 213 213 213 213 197 190 183 173 165 157 150 145 135 129

105 213 213 213 200 193 186 178 167 156 148 141 136 126 120
110 213 213 213 197 189 181 173 159 148 140 133 128 118 112
115 213 213 202 194 185 176 166 152 141 133 126 121 112 105
120 213 213 200 191 181 171 160 145 135 126 120 115 106 99
125 213 213 197 188 177 165 154 139 129 121 114 109 100 94

130 213 213 195 184 173 159 148 134 124 116 110 104 95 89
135 213 202 192 180 167 154 143 129 119 111 105 100 91 85
140 213 200 189 177 162 149 139 125 115 107 101 96 87 81
145 213 198 186 173 157 145 135 121 111 104 97 93 84 77
150 213 196 183 168 153 141 131 118 108 100 94 89 80 74

155 213 194 180 164 149 137 127 114 105 97 91 86 77 72
160 213 192 177 160 146 134 124 111 102 94 89 84 75 69
165 202 189 173 156 142 131 121 109 99 92 86 81 72 67
170 201 187 170 153 139 128 119 106 97 90 84 79 70 64
175 199 185 166 150 136 125 116 104 95 87 82 77 68 62

180 198 183 163 147 134 123 114 102 93 85 80 75 66 61

185 196 180 160 144 131 121 112 100 92 84 78 73 65 59
190 195 177 157 142 129 119 110 98 89 82 76 72 63 57
195 193 174 155 139 127 117 108 96 87 80 75 70 62 56
200 191 172 152 137 125 115 107 95 86 79 73 69 60 55

205 190 169 150 135 123 113 105 93 85 78 72 68 59 53

210 188 167 148 133 121 112 104 92 83 76 71 66 58 52
215 186 164 146 131 120 110 102 91 82 75 70 65 57 51
220 185 162 144 130 118 109 101 90 81 74 69 64 56 50
225 183 160 142 128 117 108 100 89 80 73 68 63 55 49

230 181 158 140 127 116 106 99 88 79 72 67 62 54 48

235 179 156 139 125 114 105 98 87 78 71 66 62 53 48
240 177 154 137 124 113 104 97 86 77 71 65 61 52 47
245 175 153 136 123 112 103 96 85 76 70 64 60 52 46
250 173 151 135 122 111 102 95 84 76 69 64 59 51 45

47
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section four

Table 23. Flange dependent shear strength factor, q 1 (in N/mm 2 )

(a) Grade 43 steel (Pv = 265 N/mm 2 )

Stiffener spacing ratio a/d

d/t 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 12 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 3.0

55 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
65 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9
75 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 27 52 67 68

80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 44 79 92 96 96 89
85 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 67 106 119 122 122 114 104
90 0 0 0 0 0 0 51 120 140 145 144 141 128 115
95 0 0 0 0 0 29 116 154 165 165 162 156 139 124
100 0 0 0 0 0 110 155 180 185 182 176 168 148 131

105 0 0 0 0 81 151 184 201 202 196 188 179 156 138
110 0 0 0 0 133 182 208 219 217 209 199 189 165 144
115 0 0 0 79 168 207 228 235 230 221 210 198 171 149
120 0 0 0 132 197 229 247 250 243 232 219 205 176 152
125 0 0 0 168 221 248 263 264 255 241 226 211 180 155

130 0 0 91 197 242 266 278 277 264 248 231 216 183 158
135 0 0 138 221 261 281 293 288 272 254 236 220 186 160
140 0 0 172 243 278 296 307 297 278 259 240 223 188 162
145 0 0 200 262 293 312 318 304 284 263 244 226 190 163
150 0 86 224 279 308 325 328 310 288 267 246 228 192 164

155 0 133 245 296 324 336 336 316 292 270 249 231 193 165
160 0 166 264 311 338 346 343 321 296 272 251 232 194 166
165 0 194 282 325 350 354 349 325 299 275 253 234 195 167
170 0 218 298 340 360 361 355 329 302 277 255 235 196 168
175 0 239 313 354 369 368 359 332 304 279 256 237 197 168

180 65 258 327 366 377 373 364 335 306 280 258 238 198 169
185 116 275 341 377 384 378 367 337 308 282 259 239 199 170
190 151 292 356 386 390 383 371 340 310 283 260 240 199 170
195 178 307 370 394 396 387 374 342 312 285 261 241 200 170
200 202 321 382 402 401 391 377 344 313 286 262 241 200 171

205 223 335 392 408 405 394 379 346 314 287 263 242 201 171
210 242 348 402 414 409 397 382 347 316 288 264 243 201 171
215 260 360 411 420 413 400 384 349 317 289 264 243 202 172
220 276 374 418 425 417 402 386 350 318 289 265 244 202 172
225 291 387 425 429 420 405 388 351 319 290 265 244 202 172

230 305 399 432 433 423 407 389 352 319 291 266 245 203 172
235 319 409 438 437 425 409 391 354 320 291 266 245 203 173
240 332 419 443 441 428 411 392 355 321 292 267 245 203 173
245 344 427 448 444 430 412 394 355 322 292 267 246 203 173
250 356 435 452 447 432 414 395 356 322 293 268 246 204 173

48
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

Table 23 (continued)

(b) Grade 43 steel (py = 275 N/mm 2 )

Stiffener spacing ratio a/d

d/t 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 3.0

55 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
65 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 40
75 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 57 71 80 78

80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 72 97 106 109 106 98

85 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 92 122 133 135 133 123 112
90 0 0 0 0 0 0 83 138 154 158 156 152 137 122
95 0 0 0 0 0 73 136 170 179 178 173 166 148 131
100 0 0 0 0 0 132 173 195 199 195 187 179 157 139

105 0 0 0 0 108 170 210 216 216 209 200 190 166 146
110 0 0 0 0 154 200 225 235 231 222 211 200 174 152
115 0 0 0 109 188 225 245 251 244 235 222 209 180 156
120 0 0 0 155 216 247 264 265 258 245 230 216 184 160
125 0 0 52 189 240 266 280 281 269 254 237 222 188 163

130 0 0 121 217 261 284 296 293 278 260 243 226 191 165
135 0 0 162 241 280 300 312 303 286 266 247 230 194 167
140 0 0 194 262 297 316 325 312 292 271 251 233 196 169
145 0 54 221 282 313 331 336 319 297 275 254 236 198 170
150 0 119 245 300 329 344 345 325 302 278 257 238 200 171

155 0 159 266 316 345 355 353 331 306 282 260 240 201 172
160 0 190 285 331 358 364 360 335 309 284 262 242 202 173
165 0 217 303 347 370 372 366 340 312 287 264 244 203 174
170 0 240 319 363 380 379 371 343 315 289 265 245 204 175
175 32 261 335 376 388 386 376 346 317 290 267 246 205 175

180 106 280 349 388 396 391 380 349 319 292 268 247 206 176
185 146 298 364 398 403 396 384 352 321 294 270 248 207 176
190 177 314 380 407 409 400 387 354 323 295 271 249 207 177
195 203 330 393 415 414 404 390 356 324 296 272 250 208 177
200 226 344 404 422 419 408 393 358 326 297 272 251 208 178

205 247 358 415 429 424 411 396 360 327 298 273 252 209 178
210 266 371 424 434 428 414 398 362 328 299 274 252 209 178
215 283 385 433 440 432 417 400 363 329 300 275 253 210 178
220 299 399 440 445 435 420 402 364 330 301 275 253 210 179
225 314 412 447 449 438 422 404 366 331 302 276 254 210 179

230 329 423 453 453 441 424 405 367 332 302 276 254 211 179
235 343 433 459 457 444 426 407 368 333 303 277 255 211 179
240 356 443 464 460 446 428 408 369 334 303 277 255 211 180
245 368 451 469 463 448 430 410 370 334 304 278 255 211 180
250 380 459 474 466 450 431 411 371 335 304 278 256 212 180

49
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

Table 23 (continued)

(c) Grade 50 steel (Py = 340 N/mm 2 )

Stiffener spacing ratio a/d

d/t 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 3.0

55 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
65 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 33 71 76
70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 31 92 110 118 119 112
75 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 85 135 152 157 156 146 133

80 0 0 0 0 0 0 81 160 184 190 188 183 166 149

85 0 0 0 0 0 79 164 207 218 218 212 204 182 161
90 0 0 0 0 0 164 214 242 246 241 232 221 195 171
95 0 0 0 0 143 216 252 270 269 261 249 236 207 181
100 0 0 0 62 202 256 284 295 289 278 265 251 217 189

105 0 0 0 157 245 288 312 316 309 295 279 262 224 195
110 0 0 0 212 281 317 336 337 326 308 289 270 230 199
115 0 0 121 254 312 342 357 356 340 318 297 277 235 203
120 0 0 186 289 339 365 380 371 350 327 304 283 239 206
125 0 0 233 319 363 387 399 384 359 334 310 288 242 208

130 0 53 271 346 385 408 414 394 367 340 314 291 245 210
135 0 148 303 371 407 426 427 402 373 344 318 295 247 212
140 0 202 332 393 429 440 438 410 378 249 321 297 249 213
145 0 244 358 414 447 453 447 416 383 352 324 300 251 214
150 0 279 382 436 462 464 455 421 387 355 327 302 252 215

155 0 309 404 456 475 473 462 426 391 358 329 304 253 216
160 103 337 424 473 486 481 468 430 394 360 331 305 254 217
165 167 362 444 488 496 488 473 434 396 363 333 307 255 218
170 212 385 466 501 504 494 478 437 399 364 334 308 256 218
175 249 406 484 512 512 500 482 440 401 366 336 309 257 219

180 280 426 500 522 519 505 486 443 403 368 337 310 258 219
185 309 445 515 531 525 509 489 445 405 369 338 311 268 220
190 334 463 527 539 530 513 493 447 406 370 339 312 259 220
195 357 483 538 546 535 517 495 449 408 371 340 313 259 221
200 379 501 548 552 540 520 498 451 409 372 341 313 260 221

205 399 518 557 558 544 523 500 453 410 373 342 314 260 221
210 419 532 565 563 548 526 503 454 411 374 342 315 261 222
215 437 545 573 568 551 529 505 456 412 375 343 315 261 222
220 454 557 580 573 554 531 506 457 413 376 343 316 261 222
225 470 567 586 577 557 533 508 458 414 376 344 316 262 222

230 486 577 591 581 560 535 510 459 415 377 345 317 262 223
235 504 586 597 584 562 537 511 460 416 378 345 317 262 223
240 521 594 602 587 565 539 512 461 417 378 345 317 262 223
245 536 601 606 590 567 540 514 462 417 379 346 318 263 223
250 550 608 610 593 569 542 515 463 418 379 346 318 263 223

50
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

Table 23 (concluded)

(d) Grade 50 steel (py = 355 N/mm 2 )

Stiffener spacing ratio a/d

dlt 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 12 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 3.0

55 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
65 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 45 74 93 93
70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 84 120 133 137 134 124
75 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 121 160 173 176 173 160 145

80 0 0 0 0 0 0 122 186 206 209 206 200 179 160

85 0 0 0 0 0 124 192 230 240 237 230 220 195 172
90 0 0 0 0 91 195 240 265 267 260 249 237 208 183
95 0 0 0 0 177 244 278 293 290 280 266 253 221 193
100 0 0 0 119 232 282 310 318 311 299 283 267 230 200

105 0 0 0 193 274 315 337 340 331 315 296 278 237 206
110 0 0 67 243 309 344 361 362 348 327 306 286 243 210
115 0 0 164 284 340 369 385 380 361 337 314 293 248 213
120 0 0 222 319 367 392 407 395 371 345 321 298 251 216
125 0 0 266 349 392 417 425 407 380 352 326 303 254 218

130 0 122 303 376 414 437 440 417 387 357 330 306 257 220
135 0 190 335 401 439 454 452 425 393 362 334 309 259 222
140 0 239 364 424 459 468 463 432 398 366 338 312 261 223
145 0 278 390 447 477 480 472 438 403 370 340 315 263 224
150 0 312 414 470 491 490 480 443 407 373 343 317 264 225

155 74 343 436 489 504 499 486 448 410 375 345 318 265 226
160 158 370 457 505 515 507 492 452 413 378 347 320 266 227
165 210 395 480 519 524 514 498 456 416 380 349 321 267 228
170 251 418 501 532 532 520 502 459 418 382 350 323 268 228
175 285 440 519 543 540 526 507 462 420 383 351 324 269 229

180 316 460 534 552 547 531 510 464 422 385 353 325 270 230
185 344 480 548 561 553 535 514 467 424 386 354 326 270 230
190 369 501 560 569 558 539 517 469 426 388 355 326 271 230
195 392 521 571 576 563 543 520 471 427 389 356 327 271 231
200 414 538 581 582 567 546 522 473 428 390 356 328 272 231

205 435 554 590 588 571 549 524 474 429 391 357 328 272 231
210 454 568 598 593 575 552 527 476 431 392 358 329 272 232
215 473 581 605 598 578 554 529 477 432 392 359 330 273 232
220 490 592 611 602 582 557 530 478 433 393 359 330 273 232
225 507 602 617 606 584 559 532 480 433 394 360 330 273 232

230 526 612 623 610 587 561 534 481 434 394 360 331 274 233
235 544 620 628 613 590 563 535 482 435 395 361 331 274 233
240 561 628 633 616 592 564 536 483 436 395 361 332 274 233
245 575 635 637 619 594 566 538 483 436 396 362 332 274 233
250 589 642 641 622 596 567 539 484 437 396 362 332 275 233

51
BS 5950: Part 1 1990
Section four
4.4.6 Design of intermediate transverse web stiffeners
4.4.6.1 General. Intermediate transverse stiffeners may be
on one or both sides of the web.
4.4.6.2 Spacing. The spacing of intermediate stiffeners,
where they are provided, should comply with 4.4.2,
dependent on the thickness of the web.
4.4.6.3 Outstand of stiffeners. The outstand of the
stiffeners should comply with 4.5.1.2.
4.4.6.4 Minimum stiffness. Transverse web stiffeners not
subject to external loads or moments should have a second
moment of area, 1,, about the centre Iine of the web such
that:
15 ;;. 0.75dt 3 for a ;;..j2 d
and
where
d is depth of the web;
t is minimum required web thickness for spacing a using
tension field action as given in 4.4.5.4.1;
a is the actual stiffener spacing.
4.4.6.5 Additional stiffness for external loading. When
transverse web stiffeners are subject to lateral forces or to
moments due to eccentricity of transverse loads relative to
the web, the minimum value of I, given in 4.4.6.4 should be
increased by:
(a) for lateral forces: 2 FD 3 /Et;
(b) for moments: M5 D 2 /Et.
where
D is the overall depth of the section;
E is the modulus of elasticity;
F is the factored lateral force to be taken by the
stiffener and deemed to be applied at the compression
flange;
M 5 is the moment on the stiffener due to eccentric
applied load;
t is the web thickness.
No increase in the minimum value of I 5 is required for
transverse loads in line with the web.
4.4.6.6 Buckling check on intermediate transverse web
stiffeners. Stiffeners not subject to external loads or
moments should be checked for a stiffener force:
Fq = V- V5 ~Pq
where
V is the maximum shear adjacent to the stiffener;
V5 is the shear buckling resistance of the web panel
designed without using tension field action (see
4.4.5.3).
52
Stiffeners subject to external loads and moments should
meet the conditions for load carrying web stiffeners in 4.5.2.
In addition they should satisfy the following interaction
expression:
Fq-Fx Fx Ms
---"-~ + -+- ~ 1
PCJ, px Mys
IfF q < Fx then (Fq- Fx) should be taken as zero.
In the equation above:
Fq is the stiffener force given above;
Pq is the buckling resistance of an intermediate web
stiffener (see 4.5.1.5);
Fx is the external load or reaction;
Px is the buckling resistance of a load carrying stiffener
(see 4.5.1.5);
M 5 is the moment on the stiffener due to eccentric
applied load;
Mvs is the moment capacity of the stiffener based on its
elastic modulus.
4.4.6.7 Connection to web of intermediate stiffeners.
Intermediate transverse stiffeners not subject to external
loading should be connected to the web to withstand a
shear between each component and the web (in kN per
millimetre run) of not less than:
/5b 5
t2
where
t is the web thickness (in mm);
b 5 is the outstand of the stiffener (in mm).
For stiffeners subject to external loading the shear between
the web and the stiffener due to such loading has to be
added to the above value.
Stiffeners not subject to external loads or moments may
terminate clear of the tension flange and in such a situation
the distance cut short on the line of the weld should be
approximately 4t.
Stiffeners should extend to the compression flange but
need not be connected to it.
4.5 Web bearing, buckling and stiffener
design
4.5.1 General
4.5.1. 1 Introduction. This clause covers the design of webs
for beams and girders subject to loading through the flange
parallel to the plane of the web. When the web of a member
acting alone (i.e. without stiffeners) proves inadequate,
stiffeners to cover the following should be provided.
(a) Load carrying stiffener: to prevent local buckling of
the web due to concentrated loading. See 4.5.2 and 4.5.4.

(b) Bearing stiffener: to prevent local crushing of the
web due to concentrated loading. See 4.5.3 and 4.5.5.
(c) Intermediate transverse web stiffener: to prevent
buck! ing of a slender web due to shear. See 4.4.5
and 4.4.6.
(d) Torsion stiffener: to provide torsional restraint to
beams and girders at supports. See 4.5.8.
(e) Diagonal stiffener: to provide local reinforcement of
a web in shear and bearing. See 4.5.6.
(f) Tension stiffener: to transmit tensile forces applied
to a web through a flange. See 4.5.7.
The same stiffeners may perform more than one function
and their design should comply with the requirements of
those functions.
4.5.1.2 Outstand of web stiffeners. Unless the outer edge is
continuously stiffened the outstand from the face of the
web should not exceed 19t5 e.
When the outstand is between 13t5 e and 19t 5 € then the
stiffener design should be on the basis of a core section
with an outstand of 13 t 5 e.
4.5.1.3 Stiff bearing length. The stiff bearing length, b 1 ,
is that length which cannot deform appreciably in bending.
To determine b 1 the dispersion of load through a steel
bearing should be taken as 45 ° through solid material.
See figure 8.
4.5.1.4 Eccentricity. Where a load or reaction is applied
eccentric to the centreline of the web or where the centroid
of the stiffener does not lie on the centreline of the web,
the resulting eccentricity of loading should be allowed for
in design.
Figure 8. Stiff bearing length
53
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four
4.5.1.5 Buckling resistance of stiffeners. The buckling
resistance should be based on the compressive strength Pc
(see 4.7.5) of a strut using table 27(c). the radius of gyration
being taken about the axis parallel to the web. The effective
section is the full area or core area of the stiffener
(see 4.5.1.2) together with an effective length of web on
each side of the centreline of the stiffeners limited to 20
times the web thickness.
The design strength used should be the minimum value
obtained for the web or the stiffener. The reduction of
20 N/mm 2 referred to in 4.7 .5 need not be taken unless the
stiffener is attached to a welded section.
The effective length for intermediate transverse stiffeners
used in calculating the buckling resistance,Pq, should be
taken as 0.7 times the length of the stiffener.
The effective length for load carrying web stiffeners used in
calculating the buckling resistance, Px, assumes that the
flange through which the load or reaction is applied is
effectively restrained against lateral movement relative to
the other flange. It should be taken as:
(a) flange restrained against rotation in the plane of the
stiffener (by other structural elements):
LE=0.7L
(b) flange not so restrained:
LE = L
where L is the length of the stiffener.
If the load or reaction is applied to the flange by a compres·
sion member, then unless effective lateral restraint is
provided at that point, the stiffener should be designed as
part of the compression member applying the load, and the
connection should be checked for the effects of the strut
action.
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four
4.5.2 Load carrying stiffeners
4.5.2.1 Web check. Load carrying web stiffeners should be
provided where compressive forces applied through a flange
by loads or reactions exceed the buckling resistance, Pw,
of the unstiffened web, where:
Pw = (bl +nd tPc
where
b 1 is the stiff bearing length (see 4.5.1.3);
n 1 is the length obtained by dispersion at 45 ° through
half the depth of the section;
t is the web thickness;
Pc is the compressive strength from 4.7 .5 using
table 27(c) and A as follows.
In determining Pc the slenderness, A, of an unstiffened web
should be taken as 2.5d/t (where dis the depth of the web)
provided that the flange through which the load or reaction
is applied is effectively restrained against:
(a) rotation relative to the web;
(b) lateral movement relative to the other flange.
If these conditions are not met the slenderness, A, of the
web, acting as a strut, should be determined in accordance
with 4.5.1.5 for the appropriate end restraint.
4.5.2.2 Web check between stiffeners. The compressive
stress, fed, on the compression edge of a web, calculated as
follows, due to loads or reactions applied direct, or through
a flange, between web stiffeners, should not exceed the
compressive strength for edge loading, ped.
The compressive stress, fed• on the edge of a panel between
two web stiffeners should be calculated as follows.
(a) Divide point loads and distributed loads shorter than
the smaller panel dimension by the smaller panel
dimension a or d.
(b) Add the intensity (force/unit length) of any other
distributed loads.
(c) Divide by the web thickness t.
When the compression flange is restrained against rotation
relative to the web:
Ped = [ 2.75 + (a~) 2 ] (d~t) 2
OR when the compressio.n flange is not so restrained:
Ped = [ 1.0 + (a:d)2 J (d~t)2
where a is the distance between transverse web stiffeners.
4.5.3 Bearing stiffeners
Bearing stiffeners should be provided for webs where forces
applied through a flange by loads or reactions exceed the
local capacity of the web at its connection to the flange
given by:
(bl + n2 )tPyw
where
b 1 is the stiff bearing length (see 4.5.1.3);
54
n2 is the length obtained by dispersion through the
flange to the flange to web connection at a slope of
1 :2.5 to the plane of the flange;
t is the thickness of the web;
Pyw is the design strength of the web.
4.5.4 Design of load carrying stiffeners
4.5.4.1 Buckling check. The external load or reaction, F x,
on a stiffener should not exceed the buckling resistance, Px,
of the stiffener as given in 4.5.1.5.
Where the stiffener also acts as an intermediate stiffener it
should be checked for the effect of combined loads in
accordance with 4.4.6.6.
4.5.4.2 Bearing check. Load carrying web stiffeners should
also be of sufficient size that:
A> O.BFx
Pys
where
F x is the external load or reaction;
A is the area of the stiffener in contact with the flange;
Pys is the design strength of the stiffener.
4.5.5 Design of bearing stiffeners
Bearing stiffeners should be designed for the applied load or
reaction less the local capacity of the web as given in 4.5.3.
Where the web and the stiffener material are of different
strengths the lesser value should be assumed to calculate the
capacity of the web and the stiffener.
4.5.6 Design of diagonal stiffeners
Diagonal stiffeners should be designed to carry the portion
of the applied shear and bearing that exceeds the capacity
of the web.
Where the web and the stiffener are of different strengths
the value taken for design should be taken as given in 4.5.5.
4.5.7 Design of tension stiffeners
Tension stiffeners should be designed to carry the portion
of the applied load or reaction less the capacity of the web
as given in 4.5.3 for bearing stiffeners.
Where the web and the stiffener are of different strengths
the value taken for design should be taken as given in 4.5.5.
4.5.8 Torsion stiffeners
Where bearing stiffeners are required to provide torsional
restraint at the supports of the beam, they should meet the
following criteria.
(a) The conditions of 4.5.3.
(b) The second moment of area of the stiffener section
about the centreline of the web, / 5 , should be such that:
/ 5 ~ 0.34 a 5 D 3 Tc
where
a. = 0.006 for A~ 50;

a5 = 0.3/i\ for 50< i\ ~ 100;
0: 5 = 30/i\2 for i\ > 100;
D is overall depth of beam at support;
Tc is the maximum thickness of compression flange
of the span under consideration;
i\ LE!rv for the beam;
=
LE is the effective length of the beam.
4.5.9 Connection to web of load carrying and bearing
stiffeners
Stiffeners which resist loads or reactions applied through a
flange should be connected to the web by sufficient welds
or fasteners to transmit a design force equal to the lesser of:
(a) the tension capacity of the stiffener;
(b) the sum of the forces applied when they act in the
same direction or the larger of the forces when they act
in opposite directions.
Stiffeners which do not extend right across the web should
be of such length that the shear stress in the web due to the
design force transmitted by the stiffener does not exceed
the shear strength of the web. In addition, the capacity of
the web beyond the end of the stiffener should be sufficient
to resist the applied force.
4.5.1 0 Connection to flanges: stiffeners in tension
Stiffeners required to resist tension should be connected to
the flange transmitting the load by continuous welds or
non-slip fasteners.
4.5.11 Connection to flanges: stiffeners in compression
Stiffeners required to resist compression should either be
fitted against the loaded flange or connected by continuous
welds or non-slip fasteners.
The stiffener should be fitted against or connected to both
flanges when:
(a) a load is applied directly over a support;
or (b) it forms the end stiffener of a stiffened web;
or (c) it acts as a torsion stiffener.
4.5.12 Hollow sections
Where concentrated loads are applied to hollow sections
consideration should be given to local stresses and deforma-
tions and the section reinforced as necessary.
4.6 Axially loaded tension members
4.6.1 Tension capacity
The tension capacity, Pt. of a member should be taken
from:
Pt = AePv
where Ae is the effective area of the section as determined
from 3.3.3 or 4.6.2 to 4.6.4.
55
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four
4.6.2 Eccentric connections
When members are connected eccentric to the axis of the
member the resulting moment has to be allowed for in
accordance with 4.8.2, except for angles, channels and
T-sections designed to 4.6.3 or 4.6.4 which may be treated
as axially loaded members.
4.6.3 Effective areas of simple tension members
4.6.3.1 Single angles, channels and T-sections. For single
angle ties connected through one leg only, single channel
sections connected only through the web, and T-sections
connected only through the flange, the effective area
should be taken as the net area of the connected leg,
plus the area of the outstanding leg multiplied by:
3a 1
3al + a2
where
a 1 is the net sectional area of the connected leg as given
in 3.3.2;
a2 is the sectional area of the unconnected leg.
For double angle ties, connected to one side of a gusset or
section, the angles may be designed individually as given
above.
4.6.3.2 Double angles. For back-to-back double angles
connected to one side of a gusset or section which are:
(a) in contact or separated by a distance not exceeding
the aggregate thickness of the parts with solid packing
pieces;
(b) connected by bolts or welding such that the slender-
ness of the individual components does not exceed 80;
then the effective area, A 8 , may be taken as the net area of
the connected legs plus the area of the outstanding legs
multiplied by:
5a 1
5a 1 + a2
where
a 1 is the net sectional area of the connected parts as
given in 3.3.2;
a 2 is the sectional area of the unconnected parts.
NOTE. The area of the leg of an angle should be taken as the
product of the thickness by the length from the outer corner minus
half the thickness, and the area of the leg of aT-section as the
product of the thickness by the depth minus the thickness of the
flange.
4.6.3.3 Other types. The following types of members
should be designed using the net area from 3.3.2 and
treated as axially loaded members.
(a) Single angle ties connected through both legs by lug
angles or otherwise, single channel sections connected by
both flanges and T -sections connected only through the
leg or both the flange and the leg.
(b) Double angle ties connected to both sides of a gusset
or section provided that the components are held
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

longitudinally parallel and connected by bolts or welds

in at least two places and held apart by solid packing Table 24. Nominal effective length, L E, for a strut
pieces. The outermost of such connections should be at NOTE. For angle, channel and T-section struts, see 4.7.10.
a distance from each end of approximately nine times
the smallest leg length. The bolts should be of the same
diameter as the end connections. Conditions of restraint at ends (in plane Effective
under consideration) length, LE
(c) The internal bays of continuous ties.
Effectively Restrained in direction
4.6.4 Laced or battened ties held in at both ends 0.7L
Any lacing or battening systems should be designed to position at
resist the greater of the following. both ends Partially restrained in
(a) Forces and/or moments induced by eccentric loads, direction at both ends 0.85L
applied moments or transverse forces, including self
weight and wind resistance. Restrained in direction
at one end 0.85L
(b) Forces and/or moments induced by a transverse
shear on the complete member at any point in its length NOT restrained in direction
equal to 1 %of the factored axial load in the member. at either end 1.0L
These forces may be taken as shared equally between all
transverse lacing or battening systems in parallel planes. One end Other end

4.7 Compression members Effectively Not held Effectively

held in in restrained
position and position in direction 1.2L
4. 7. 1 General
restrained
4.7.1.1 Length. The length, L, of a compression member in in direction Partially
any plane should be taken as the distance between the restrained
points at which it has effective positional or directional in direction 1.5L
restraint against buckling in that plane.
4.7.1.2 Restraints. A restraint should have sufficient NOT restrained
strength and stiffness to inhibit movement of the restrained in direction 2.0L
point in position or direction as appropriate.
Positional restraints should be connected to an appropriate
(c) For stanchions in single storey buildings of simple
shear diaphragm or system of triangulated bracing.
construction see 0.1.
Positional restraints to compression members forming the
(d) For members forming part of a frame with rigid
flanges of lattice girders should satisfy the recommendations
joints see appendix E.
for lateral restraint of beams given in 4.3.2.
All other positional restraints to compression members 4.7.3 Slenderness
should be capable of resisting a force of not less than 1 % of
4.7 .3.1 General. The value of the slenderness, A., should be
the axial force in the restrained member and transferring it
taken as the effective length, LE, divided by the radius of
to the adjacent points of positional restraint.
gyration about the relevant axis except as given in 4.7 .9 for
4.7 .2 Effective lengths battened struts or 4.7.13 for back·to-back struts.
For angles, channels and T-sections the effective length 4.7 .3.2 Maximum slenderness. The value of A. should not
should be determined from its length centre-to-centre of exceed the following:
intersections with restraining members in accordance with (a) for members resisting loads other than
the conditions of restraint in the appropriate plane as given wind loads 180
in table 24 or as limited by 4.7.10.
(b) for members resisting self weight and
In other cases the effective length, LE, should be determined wind loads only 250
from the actual length and the conditions of restraint in the
(c) for any member normally acting as a tie
relevant plane, as follows.
but subject to reversal of stress resulting
(a) In determining the conditions of restraint, restraining from the action of wind 350
members which under the same loading conditions are
Members whose slenderness exceeds 180 should be checked
required to carry more than 90% of their reduced
moment capacity (i.e. reduced for axial load) should be for self weight deflection. If this exceeds length/1000 the
effect of bending should be taken into account in design.
taken as incapable of providing directional restraint to
the member under consideration.
(b) For standard conditions of restraint see table 24.

56
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

4. 7.4 Compression resistance
The compression resistance, Pc. of a member should be
obtained from:
(a) for plastic, compact or semi-compact sections:
Pc=A 9 Pc
(b) slender sections:
Pc=AgPcs
where
A 9 is the gross sectional area (see 3.3.1);
Pc is the compressive strength (see 4.7.5);
Pes is the compressive strength for slender sections
(see 4.7.5 and 3.6).
Steel sections encased in structural concrete may be
designed as cased struts in accordance with 4.14.
For single angle, channel and T-section struts reference
should be made to 4.7.10.
4. 7.5 Compressive strength
The compressive strength,Pc. depends on the slenderness, A.,
of the gross section, the design strength, Pv, or the reduced
design strength for slender sections (see 3.6) and the
relevant strut curve.
Pc may be established first by reference to tables 25
and 26. These indicate, for any shape, thickness of steel and
axis of buckling, which of the four strut tables 27(a) to (d).
is relevant to the case. Alternatively, Pc may be obtained
from the formula given in appendix C.
For sections fabricated from plate by welding, the value
of Pv should be reduced by 20 N/mm 2 .

Table 25. Strut table selection

Type of section Thickness Axis of buckling

(see note 1)
x-x y-y

Hot-rolled structural hollow section 27(a) 27(a)

Rolled !-section (or as shown in table 26(a)) 27(a) 27(b)

Rolled H-section (or as shown in table 26(a)) up to 40 mm 27(b) 27(c)

over 40 mm 27(c) 27(d)

Welded plate I or H-section (see note 2 and 4.7 .5) up to 40 mm 27(b) 27(c)
(or as shown in table 26(c)) over 40 mm 27(b) 27(d)

Rolled I or H-section with welded flange cover plates up to 40 mm 27(b) 27(a)

(as shown in table 26(b)) over 40 mm 27(c) 27(b)

Welded box section (see note 3 and 4.7.5) up to 40 mm 27(b) 27(b)

over 40 mm 27(c) 27(c)

Round, square or flat bar up to 40 mm 27(b) 27(b)

over 40 mm 27(c) 27(c)

Rolled angle Buckling about

Rolled channel or T -section any axis
Two rolled sections laced or battened 27(c)
Two rolled sections back-to-back
Compound rolled sections

NOTE 1. For thicknesses between 40 mm and 50 mm the value of Pc may be taken as the average of the values for
thicknesses up to 40 mm and over 40 mm.
NOTE 2. For welded plate I or H-sections where it can be guaranteed that the edges of the flanges will only be
flame-<:ut, table 27(b) may be used for buckling about the y-y axis for flanges up to 40 mm thick, and table 27(c)
for flanges over 40 mm thick.
NOTE 3. 'Welded box section' includes any box section fabricated from plates or rolled sections, provided that all
longitudinal welds are near the corners of the section. Box sections with welded longitudinal stiffeners are not
included in this category.

57
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section four

Table 26. Type of section obtained for table 25

(a) Rolled I or H-section

8
r..
'
..I
I I

EiJ
r ~ ..,
u
0.25<8<0.8

rn NOTE. Large outstands

may be subject to
local buckling, see 3.6.

(b) Rolled I or H-section with welded flange cover plate

r
I
8
'
I
..I

w
r .u
..1
u
-208
s""'·

EiJ
(c) Welded plate I or H-section

r 8 .,

Ff4
I I

w u
8
.;;;o.25

m NOTE. Large outstands

may be subject to
local buckling, see 3.6.

58
 BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section four

Table 27(a). Compressive strength, Pc, (in N/mm 2 ) for struts

:~
15
225

225
245

245
255

255
265

265
275

275
305

305
320

320
325

325
335

335
340

340
355

355
395

394
410

409
415

414
430

429
450

448
20 225 244 254 264 273 303 317 322 332 337 351 390 405 410 424 444
25 222 241 251 261 270 299 314 318 328 333 347 386 400 405 419 438
30 220 239 248 258 267 296 310 315 324 329 343 381 395 399 414 432
35 217 236 245 254 264 292 306 310 320 324 338 375 389 393 407 425

40 214 233 242 251 260 287 301 305 315 319 333 368 382 386 399 417
42 213 231 240 249 258 285 299 303 312 317 330 365 378 383 396 413
44 212 230 239 248 257 283 297 301 310 314 327 362 375 379 392 409
46 210 228 237 246 255 281 294 299 307 312 325 359 371 375 388 404
48 209 227 236 244 253 279 292 296 305 309 322 355 367 371 383 399

50 208 225 234 242 251 277 289 293 302 306 318 351 363 367 379 394
52 206 223 232 241 249 274 286 291 299 303 315 346 358 362 373 388
54 205 222 230 238 247 271 283 287 295 299 311 342 353 366 367 381
56 203 220 228 236 244 268 280 284 292 296 307 336 347 350 361 374
58 201 218 226 234 242 265 277 281 288 292 303 331 341 344 354 366

60 200 216 224 232 239 262 273 277 284 288 298 325 335 337 347 358
62 198 214 221 229 236 259 269 273 280 283 293 318 328 330 339 349
64 196 211 219 226 234 255 265 268 275 278 288 311 320 322 331 340
66 194 209 216 223 230 251 261 264 270 273 282 304 312 314 322 330
68 192 206 213 220 227 247 256 259 265 268 276 296 304 306 313 320

70 189 204 210 217 224 242 251 254 259 262 270 288 295 297 303 310
72 187 201 207 214 220 237 246 248 253 256 264 280 287 288 294 299
74 184 198 204 210 216 233 240 243 247 250 256 272 278 279 284 289
76 182 194 200 206 212 227 235 237 241 243 249 264 269 270 275 279
78 179 191 197 202 208 222 229 231 235 237 242 255 260 261 265 269

80 176 188 193 198 203 217 223 225 229 230 235 247 251 252 256 259
82 173 184 189 194 199 211 217 219 222 224 228 239 243 243 247 250
84 170 181 185 190 194 206 211 213 216 217 221 231 234 235 2-38 240
86 167 177 181 186 190 200 205 207 209 211 214 223 226 226 229 231
88 164 173 177 181 185 195 199 200 203 204 208 215 218 218 221 223

90 161 169 173 177 180 189 193 195 197 198 201 208 211 211 213 215
92 158 166 169 173 176 184 188 189 191 192 194 201 203 203 206 207
94 154 162 165 168 171 179 182 183 185 186 188 194 196 196 198 200
96 151 158 161 164 166 173 176 177 179 180 182 187 190 189 191 192
98 147 154 157 159 162 168 171 172 173 174 176 181 183 183 185 186

59
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section four

Table 27(a) (concluded)

~ 100
225

144
245

150
255

153
265

155
275

157
305

163
320

166
325

167
335

168
340

169
355

171
395

175
410

176
415

177
430

178
450

179
102 141 146 149 151 153 158 161 161 163 163 165 169 170 171 172 173
104 137 142 145 147 149 154 156 156 158 158 160 163 165 165 166 167
106 134 139 141 143 145 149 151 152 153 153 155 158 159 159 160 161
108 131 135 137 139 141 145 146 147 148 149 150 153 154 154 155 156

110 127 132 133 135 137 140 142 143 144 144 145 148 149 149 150 151
112 124 128 130 131 133 136 138 138 139 140 141 143 144 144 145 146
114 121 125 126 128 129 132 134 134 135 135 136 139 140 140 141 141
116 118 121 123 124 125 129 130 130 131 131 132 135 135 135 136 137
118 115 118 120 121 122 125 126 126 127 127 128 130 131 131 132 133

120 112 115 116 118 119 121 122 123 123 124 125 127 127 127 128 129
122 109 112 113 114 115 118 119 119 120 120 121 123 123 123 124 125
124 107 109 110 111 112 115 116 116 116 117 117 119 120 120 120 121
126 104 106 107 108 109 111 112 113 113 113 114 116 116 116 117 117
128 101 104 105 105 106 108 109 109 110 110 111 112 113 113 113 114

130 99 101 102 103 103 105 106 106 107 107 108 109 110 110 110 111
135 93 95 96 96 97 98 99 99 100 100 101 102 102 102 103 103
140 87 89 90 90 91 92 93 93 93 94 94 95 95 96 96 96
145 82 84 84 85 85 86 87 87 87 88 88 89 89 89 90 90
150 78 79 79 80 80 81 82 82 82 82 83 83 84 84 84 89

155 73 74 75 75 75 76 77 77 77 77 78 78 79 79 79 79
160 69 70 70 71 71 72 72 72 73 73 73 74 74 74 74 74
165 65 66 67 67 67 68 68 68 69 69 69 70 70 70 70 70
170 62 63 63 63 64 64 65 65 65 65 65 66 66 66 66 66
175 59 59 60 60 60 61 61 61 61 61 62 62 62 62 62 63

180 56 56 57 57 57 58 58 58 58 58 58 59 59 59 59 59
185 53 54 54 54 54 55 55 55 55 55 55 56 56 56 56 56
190 51 51 51 51 52 52 52 52 52 53 53 53 53 53 53 53
195 48 49 49 49 49 49 50 50 50 50 50 50 51 51 51 51
200 46 46 47 47 47 47 47 47 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48

210 42 42 42 42 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 44 44 44 44 44
220 38 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
230 35 35 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 37 37 37 37 37
240 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 34 34 34 34 34 34
250 30 30 30 30 30 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31

260 28 28 28 28 28 28 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29
270 26 26 26 26 26 26 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27
280 24 24 24 24 24 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
290 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
300 21 21 21 21 21 21 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22

310 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 21
320 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
330 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
340 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
350 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16

60
 BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section four

Table 27(b). Compressive strength,Pc. (in N/mm 2 ) for struts

~15
225

225
245

245
255

255
265

265
275

275
305

305
320

320
325

325
335

335
340

340
355

355
395

394
410

409
415

413
430

428
450

447
20 224 243 253 263 272 301 315 320 330 334 349 387 401 406 420 439
25 220 239 248 258 267 295 309 314 323 328 342 379 393 397 411 430
30 216 234 243 253 262 289 303 307 316 321 335 371 384 389 402 420
35 211 229 238 247 256 283 296 300 309 313 327 361 374 379 392 409

40 207 224 233 241 250 276 288 293 301 305 318 351 364 368 380 396
42 205 222 231 239 248 273 285 289 298 302 314 347 359 363 375 391
44 203 220 228 237 245 270 282 286 294 298 310 342 354 358 369 385
46 201 218 226 234 242 267 279 283 291 294 306 337 349 352 364 379
48 199 215 223 231 239 263 275 279 287 291 302 332 343 347 358 372

50 197 213 221 229 237 260 271 275 283 286 298 327 337 341 351 365
52 195 210 218 226 234 256 267 271 278 282 293 321 331 334 349 358
54 192 208 215 223 230 253 263 267 274 278 288 315 325 328 337 350
56 190 205 213 220 227 249 259 263 269 273 283 309 318 321 330 342
58 188 202 210 217 224 245 255 258 265 268 278 302 311 314 322 333

60 185 200 207 214 221 241 250 254 260 263 272 295 304 306 314 325
62 183 197 204 210 217 236 246 249 255 258 266 288 296 299 306 316
64 180 194 200 207 213 232 241 244 249 252 261 281 289 291 298 307
66 178 191 197 203 210 227 236 239 244 247 255 274 281 283 289 298
68 175 188 194 200 206 223 231 233 239 241 249 267 273 275 281 288

70 172 185 190 196 202 218 226 228 233 235 242 259 265 267 272 279
72 169 181 187 193 198 213 220 223 227 230 236 252 257 259 264 270
74 167 178 183 189 194 208 215 217 222 224 230 244 249 251 255 261
76 164 175 180 185 190 204 210 212 216 218 223 237 241 243 247 252
78 161 171 176 181 186 199 205 206 210 212 217 230 234 235 239 244

80 158 168 172 177 181 194 199 201 204 206 211 222 226 227 231 235
82 155 164 169 173 177 189 194 196 199 200 205 215 219 220 223 227
84 152 161 165 169 173 184 189 190 193 195 199 209 212 213 216 219
86 149 157 161 165 169 179 183 185 188 189 193 202 205 206 208 212
88 146 154 158 161 165 174 178 180 182 183 187 195 198 199 201 204

90 143 150 154 157 161 169 173 175 177 178 181 189 192 192 195 197
92 139 147 150 153 156 165 168 170 172 173 176 183 185 186 188 191
94 136 143 147 150 152 160 164 165 167 168 171 177 179 180 182 184
96 133 140 143 146 148 156 159 160 162 163 165 171 173 174 176 178
98 130 137 139 142 145 151 154 155 157 158 160 166 168 168 170 172

100 127 133 136 138 141 147 150 151 152 153 155 161 162 163 164 166
102 124 130 132 135 137 143 146 146 148 149 151 156 157 158 159 161
104 122 127 129 131 133 139 141 142 144 144 146 151 152 153 154 156
106 119 124 126 128 130 135 137 138 139 140 142 146 148 148 149 151
108 116 121 123 125 126 131 133 134 135 136 138 142 143 143 144 146

61
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

Table 27(b) (concluded)

I~110
225

113
245

118
255

120
265

121
275

123
305

128
320

130
325

130
335

131
340

132
355

134
395

137
410

139
415

139
430

140
450

141
112 111 115 117 118 120 124 126 127 128 128 130 133 134 135 136 137
114 108 112 114 115 117 121 123 123 124 125 126 129 130 131 132 133
116 105 109 111 112 114 117 119 120 121 121 122 125 126 127 128 129
118 103 106 108 109 111 114 116 116 117 118 119 122 123 123 124 125

120 100 104 105 107 108 111 113 113 114 114 116 118 119 119 120 121
122 98 101 103 104 105 108 110 110 111 111 112 115 116 116 117 118
124 96 99 100 101 102 105 107 107 108 108 109 112 112 113 113 114
126 94 96 97 99 100 103 104 104 106 105 106 109 109 110 110 111
128 91 94 95 96 97 100 101 101 102 102 103 106 106 106 107 108

130 89 92 93 94 95 97 98 99 99 100 101 103 103 104 104 105

135 84 86 87 88 89 91 92 93 93 93 94 96 96 97 97 98
140 79 81 82 83 84 86 87 87 87 88 88 90 90 91 91 92
145 76 77 78 78 79 81 81 82 82 82 83 84 85 85 85 86
150 71 72 73 74 74 76 77 77 77 77 78 79 80 80 80 81

155 67 69 69 70 70 72 72 72 73 73 73 75 75 75 75 76
160 64 65 66 66 66 68 68 68 69 69 69 70 71 71 71 71
165 60 61 62 63 63 64 65 65 65 65 66 66 67 67 67 67
170 57 58 59 59 60 61 61 61 61 62 62 63 63 63 63 64
175 55 56 56 56 57 58 58 58 58 58 59 59 60 60 60 60

180 52 53 53 54 54 55 55 55 55 55 56 56 57 57 57 57
185 49 50 51 51 51 52 52 52 53 53 53 54 54 54 54 54
190 47 48 48 48 49 49 50 50 50 50 51 50 51 51 51 52
195 45 46 46 46 47 47 47 48 48 48 48 48 49 49 49 49
200 43 44 44 44 44 45 45 45 46 46 46 46 46 46 47 47

210 39 40 40 40 41 41 41 41 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 43
220 36 37 37 37 37 38 38 38 38 38 38 39 39 39 39 39
230 33 34 34 34 34 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 36 36
240 31 31 31 31 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 33 33 33 33 33
250 29 29 29 29 29 29 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30

260 27 27 27 27 27 27 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28
270 25 25 25 25 25 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
280 23 23 23 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
290 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 23 23 23 23 23 23
300 20 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21

310 19 19 19 19 19 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
320 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 19 19 19 19 19 19
330 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
340 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
350 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16

62
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

Table 27(c). Compressive strength,Pc. (in N/mm 2 ) for struts

~15
225

225
245

245
255

255
265

265
275

275
305

305
320

320
325

325
335

335
340

340
355

355
395

393
410

408
415

413
430

427
450

446
20 224 242 252 261 271 299 312 317 326 331 345 382 396 401 414 433
25 217 235 245 254 263 290 303 308 317 321 335 370 384 388 402 419
30 211 228 237 246 255 281 294 298 307 311 324 358 371 375 388 405
35 204 221 230 238 247 272 284 288 296 300 313 345 357 361 374 389

40 198 214 222 230 238 262 274 278 285 289 301 332 343 347 358 373
42 195 211 219 227 235 258 269 273 281 285 296 326 337 340 361 366
44 193 208 216 224 231 254 265 269 276 280 291 320 330 334 344 358
46 190 205 213 220 228 250 261 264 271 275 286 314 324 327 337 351
48 187 202 209 217 224 246 266 260 267 270 280 307 317 321 330 343

50 184 199 206 213 220 241 252 255 262 265 275 301 310 314 323 335
52 181 196 203 210 217 237 247 250 257 260 270 294 303 306 315 327
54 179 193 199 206 213 232 242 245 252 255 264 288 296 299 308 319
56 176 189 196 202 209 228 237 240 246 249 258 281 289 292 300 310
58 173 186 192 199 205 223 232 235 241 244 252 274 282 284 292 302

60 170 183 189 195 201 219 227 230 236 238 247 267 274 277 284 293
62 167 179 185 191 197 214 222 225 230 233 241 260 267 269 276 285
64 164 176 182 188 193 210 217 220 225 227 235 253 260 262 268 276
66 161 173 178 184 189 205 212 215 220 222 229 246 252 254 260 268
68 158 169 175 180 185 200 207 210 214 216 223 239 245 247 252 259

70 155 166 171 176 181 195 202 204 209 211 217 232 238 239 244 251
72 152 163 168 172 177 191 197 199 203 205 211 226 231 232 237 243
74 149 159 164 169 173 186 192 194 198 200 205 219 223 225 229 235
76 146 156 160 165 169 181 187 189 193 194 200 212 217 218 222 227
78 143 152 157 161 165 177 182 184 187 189 194 206 210 211 215 220

80 140 149 153 157 161 172 177 179 182 184 188 200 203 205 208 213
82 137 146 150 154 157 168 173 174 177 179 183 193 197 198 201 205
84 134 142 146 150 154 163 168 169 172 174 178 187 191 192 195 199
86 132 139 143 146 150 159 163 165 168 169 173 182 185 186 189 192
88 129 136 139 143 146 155 159 160 163 164 168 176 179 180 183 186

90 126 133 136 139 142 151 155 156 158 159 163 171 173 174 177 180
92 123 130 133 136 139 147 150 152 154 155 158 165 168 169 171 174
94 120 127 130 133 135 143 146 147 149 150 153 160 163 163 166 168
96 118 124 127 129 132 139 142 143 145 146 149 155 158 158 160 163
98 115 121 123 126 129 135 138 139 141 142 145 151 153 154 155 158

100 112 118 120 123 125 132 134 135 137 138 140 146 148 149 151 153
102 110 115 118 120 122 128 131 132 133 134 136 142 144 144 146 148
104 107 112 115 117 119 125 127 128 130 130 133 138 130 140 142 143
106 105 110 112 114 116 121 124 125 126 127 129 134 135 136 137 139
108 102 107 109 111 113 118 120 121 123 123 125 130 131 132 133 135

63
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Section four

Table 27(c) (concluded)

~110
225

100
245

104
255

106
265

108
275

110
305

115
320

117
325

118
335

119
340

120
355

122
395

126
410

127
415

128
430

129
450

131
112 98 102 104 106 107 112 114 115 116 117 118 122 124 124 125 127
114 96 99 101 103 105 109 111 112 113 113 115 119 120 121 122 123
116 93 97 99 101 102 106 108 109 110 110 112 116 117 117 118 120
118 91 95 96 98 100 104 105 106 107 107 109 112 114 114 115 116

120 89 93 94 96 97 101 103 103 104 105 106 109 110 111 112 113
122 87 91 92 93 95 98 100 100 101 102 103 106 107 108 109 110
124 85 88 90 91 92 96 97 98 99 99 100 103 104 105 106 107
126 83 86 88 89 90 94 95 95 96 97 98 101 102 102 103 104
128 82 84 86 87 88 91 93 93 94 94 95 98 99 99 100 101

130 80 82 84 85 86 89 90 91 91 92 93 95 96 97 97 98
135 75 78 79 80 81 84 85 85 86 86 87 89 90 90 91 92
140 71 74 75 76 76 79 80 80 81 81 82 84 85 85 85 86
145 68 70 70 71 72 74 75 76 76 76 77 79 80 80 80 81
150 64 66 67 68 68 70 71 71 72 72 73 74 75 75 76 76

155 61 63 63 64 65 66 67 67 68 68 69 70 71 71 71 72
160 58 59 60 61 61 63 64 64 64 64 65 66 67 67 67 68
165 55 56 57 58 58 60 60 60 61 61 61 63 63 63 64 64
170 52 54 54 55 55 57 57 57 58 58 58 59 60 60 60 61
175 50 51 52 52 53 54 54 54 55 55 55 56 57 57 57 58

180 48 49 49 50 50 51 52 52 52 52 53 54 54 54 54 55
185 46 46 47 47 48 49 49 49 50 50 50 51 51 51 52 52
190 43 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 47 47 48 48 49 49 49 49
195 42 42 43 43 43 44 45 45 45 45 46 46 46 47 47 47
200 40 41 41 41 42 42 43 43 43 43 43 44 44 44 45 45

210 36 37 38 38 38 39 39 39 39 39 40 40 41 41 41 41
220 34 34 35 35 35 36 36 36 36 36 36 37 37 37 37 38
230 31 32 32 32 32 33 33 33 33 33 34 34 34 34 34 35
240 29 29 29 30 30 30 31 31 31 31 31 31 32 32 32 32
250 27 27 27 28 28 28 28 28 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29

260 25 25 26 26 26 26 26 26 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27
270 23 24 24 24 24 24 24 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 26 25
280 22 22 22 22 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 24 24 24 24
290 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
300 19 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 21 21 21 21 21

310 18 18 18 18 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 20
320 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
330 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
340 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
350 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15

64
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

Table 27(d). Compressive strength, Pc. (in N/mm 2 ) for struts

1:\
15
20
225

225
223
245

245
241
255

255
250
265

265
259
275

275
269
305

305
296
320

320
309
325

325
314
335

335
323
340

340
327
355

355
341
395

393
376
410

407
390
415

411
394
430

425
408
450

444
426
25 214 231 240 249 257 283 296 301 309 313 326 360 373 377 390 407
30 205 222 230 238 247 271 283 287 296 300 312 344 356 360 372 388
35 196 212 220 228 236 259 271 274 282 286 297 327 339 342 353 368

40 188 203 210 218 225 247 258 261 268 272 283 310 321 324 334 348
42 184 199 206 214 221 242 252 256 263 266 277 304 314 317 327 340
44 181 195 202 209 216 237 247 251 257 261 271 297 306 309 319 331
46 178 192 199 205 212 232 242 245 252 255 265 290 299 302 311 323
48 174 188 195 201 208 227 237 240 246 249 259 283 291 294 303 314

50 171 184 191 197 204 222 232 235 241 244 253 276 284 287 295 306
52 168 181 187 193 199 217 226 229 235 238 246 269 277 279 287 298
54 165 177 183 189 195 213 221 224 229 232 240 262 269 272 279 289
56 161 173 179 185 191 208 216 219 224 227 234 255 262 264 271 281
58 158 170 175 181 187 203 211 213 218 221 229 248 255 257 264 272

60 155 166 172 177 183 198 206 208 213 215 223 241 247 250 256 264
62 152 163 168 173 178 193 201 203 208 210 217 234 240 242 248 256
64 149 159 164 169 174 189 196 198 202 204 211 227 233 235 241 248
66 145 156 160 165 170 184 191 193 197 199 205 221 226 228 234 240
68 142 152 157 162 166 179 186 188 192 194 200 214 220 221 226 233

70 139 149 153 158 162 175 181 183 187 189 194 208 213 215 219 225
72 136 145 150 154 158 170 176 178 182 183 189 202 207 208 213 218
74 133 142 146 150 155 166 171 173 177 178 183 196 200 202 206 211
76 130 139 143 147 151 162 167 169 172 173 178 190 194 195 199 204
78 127 136 139 143 147 157 162 164 167 169 173 184 188 189 193 198

80 125 132 136 140 143 153 158 160 163 164 168 179 182 184 187 191
82 122 129 133 136 140 149 154 155 158 159 163 173 177 178 181 185
84 119 126 130 133 136 145 150 151 154 155 159 168 171 172 176 179
86 117 123 127 130 133 142 146 147 149 151 154 163 166 167 170 174
88 114 120 123 127 130 138 142 143 145 146 150 158 161 162 165 168

90 111 118 121 123 126 134 138 139 141 142 146 154 156 157 160 163
92 109 115 118 120 123 131 134 135 137 138 142 149 152 152 155 158
94 106 112 115 117 120 127 131 132 134 135 138 145 147 148 150 153
96 104 109 112 115 117 124 127 128 130 131 134 140 143 143 146 148
98 101 107 109 112 114 121 124 125 126 127 130 136 138 139 141 144

100 99 104 107 109 111 117 120 121 123 124 126 132 134 135 137 139
102 97 102 104 106 108 114 117 118 120 121 123 129 131 131 133 135
104 95 99 102 104 106 111 114 115 116 117 120 125 127 127 .129 131
106 93 97 99 101 103 109 111 112 113 114 116 121 123 124 125 127
108 90 95 97 99 101 106 108 109 110 111 113 118 120 120 122 124
-- ----

65
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

Table 27(d) (concluded)

~110
225

88
245

93
255

95
265

96
275

98
305

103
320

105
325

106
335

108
340

108
355

110
395

115
410

116
415

117
430

118
450

120
112 86 90 92 94 96 101 103 103 105 105 107 112 113 114 115 117
114 84 88 90 92 94 98 100 101 102 103 104 109 110 110 112 113
116 83 86 88 90 91 96 98 98 99 100 102 106 107 107 109 110
118 81 84 86 88 89 93 95 96 97 97 99 103 104 105 106 107

120 79 83 84 86 87 91 93 94 94 95 96 100 102 102 103 104

122 77 81 82 84 85 89 91 91 92 93 94 97 99 99 100 102
124 76 79 81 82 83 87 88 89 90 90 92 95 96 96 97 99
126 74 77 79 80 81 84 86 87 88 88 89 93 94 94 95 96
128 72 75 77 78 79 83 84 85 85 86 87 90 92 92 93 94

130 71 74 75 76 77 81 82 83 83 84 85 88 89 89 90 91
135 67 70 71 72 73 76 77 78 79 79 80 83 84 84 85 86
140 64 66 67 68 69 72 73 74 74 74 75 78 79 79 80 81
145 60 63 64 65 66 68 69 70 70 70 71 73 74 74 75 76
150 58 59 61 61 62 64 65 66 66 66 67 69 70 70 71 71

155 55 57 58 58 59 61 62 62 63 63 64 65 66 66 67 67
160 52 54 55 55 56 58 59 59 59 60 60 62 63 63 63 64
165 50 51 52 53 53 55 56 56 56 57 57 59 59 59 60 60
170 47 49 50 50 51 52 53 53 54 54 54 56 56 56 57 57
175 45 47 47 48 48 50 50 51 51 51 52 53 54 54 54 54

180 43 45 45 46 46 47 48 48 48 49 49 50 51 51 51 52
185 42 42 43 43 44 45 46 46 46 46 47 48 48 48 49 49
190 40 41 41 42 42 43 44 44 44 44 45 46 46 46 47 47
195 38 39 40 40 40 41 42 42 42 42 43 44 44 44 44 45
200 36 37 38 38 39 40 40 40 40 41 41 42 42 42 42 43

210 34 34 35 35 35 36 37 37 37 37 37 38 39 39 39 39
220 31 32 32 32 33 33 34 34 34 34 34 35 35 35 36 36
230 29 29 30 30 30 31 31 31 31 32 32 32 33 33 33 33
240 27 27 28 28 28 29 29 29 29 29 29 30 30 30 30 30
250 25 25 26 26 26 27 27 27 27 27 27 28 28 28 28 28

260 23 24 24 24 24 25 25 25 25 25 25 26 26 26 26 26
270 22 22 23 23 23 23 23 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
280 20 21 21 21 21 22 22 22 22 22 22 23 23 23 23 23
290 19 20 20 20 20 20 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
300 18 18 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 20 20 20 20 20 20

310 17 17 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 19 19 19 19 19
320 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 18
330 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17
340 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 16
350 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 15

66

4.7 .6 Eccentric connections
Moments due to eccentricity of connections should be
calculated and allowed for in design in accordance with 4.8
except as follows.
{a) Columns in simple construction. The eccentricity of·
the beam end reactions or other loads should be as
follows.
(1) For a beam supported on the cap plate, the load
should be taken as acting at the face of the column,
or edge of packing if used, towards the span of the
beam.
(2) For a roof truss supported on the cap plate,
eccentricity may be neglected provided simple
connections are used which do not develop significant
moments adversely affecting the structure.
(3) In all other cases the load should be taken as
acting at a distance from the face of the steel column
equal to 100 mm, or at the centre of the length of stiff
bearing whichever gives the greater eccentricity.
(b) Laced, battened struts and batten-starred angle struts.
These may be treated as single integral members
and designed as axially loaded struts in accordance
with 4.7.8, 4.7.9 and 4.7.11 respectively.
(c) Angles, channels and T-sections. The effect of
eccentric end connections may be neglected and the
members designed in accordance with 4.7.10.
(d) Continuous construction. This should be in accord-
ance with section five.
4.7.7 Columns in simple construction
In structures of simple construction it is not necessary to
consider the effect on columns of pattern loading. For the
purpose of column design, all beams supported by a column
at any one level may be assumed to be fully loaded. The
nominal moments applied to the column by simple beams
should be calculated from the eccentricities given in 4.7.6(a).
Moments due to partial fixity in semi-rigid design should be
added (see 2.1.2.4).
In multi-storey columns which are effectively continuous at
their splices, the net moment applied at any one level
should be divided between the column lengths above and
below that level in proportion to the stiffness, 1/L, of each
length, except that when the ratio of the stiffnesses does
not exceed 1.5 the moment may be divided equally.
The nominal moments applied to the column (including any
restraint moments from 2.1.2.4(b)) may be assumed to have
no effect at the levels above and below the level at which
they are applied.
When only nominal moments are applied, the column should
satisfy the following relationship:
.!..s_ + M X + ___!!_:t_ ~ 1
AgPc Mbs PyZy
where
F c is the compressive force due to axial load;
Pc is the compressive strength;
Ag is the gross cross-sectional area;
67
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four
M x is the nominal moment about the major axis;
M y is the nominal moment about the minor axis;
Mbs is the buckling resistance moment for simple
columns;
Z y is the elastic modulus about the minor axis;
Py is the design strength.
The buckling resistance moment for simple columns Mbs
should be taken as the value of Mb determined as described
in 4.3.7.3 and 4.3.7.4 but using the equivalent slenderness
XL T of the column given by:
ALT = 0.5 {L/ry)
where
L is the distance between levels at which both axes
are restrained;
ry is the radius of gyration about the minor axis.
NOTE. For circular hollow sections and for box sections of uniform
wall thickness, including RHS, within the limits given in 8.2.6.1, Mbs
equals PySx.
4.7 .8 Laced struts
A laced strut consisting of two or more main components
may be designed as a single integral member, provided that
the following conditions are met.
(a) The main components are effectively restrained
against buckling by a lacing system of flats or sections.
(b) The lacing comprises an effectively triangulated
system on each face and as far as practicable the lacing
should not vary throughout the length of the member.
(c) Except for the panels referred to in (f). double
intersection lacing systems and single intersection lacing
systems mutually opposed in direction on opposite sides
of two main components should not be combined with
members or diaphragms perpendicular to the longitudinal
axis of the strut unless all forces resulting from the
deformation of the strut members are calculated and
allowed for in the design.
(d) Single lacing systems mutually opposed in direction
on opposite sides of two main components should not
be used unless the resulting torsional effects are allowed
for.
(e) All lacings, whether in double or single intersection
systems, should be inclined at an angle between 40 °
and 70 ° to the axis of the member.
(f) Tie panels should be provided at the ends of the
lacing systems, at points where the lacing is interrupted,
and at connections with other members.
Tie panels may take the form of battens complying
with 4.7 .9; alternatively cross braced panels of equivalent
rigidity may be used.
In either case the tie panels should be designed to carry
the loads for which the lacing system is designed.
(g) The maximum slenderness, Ac, of a main component
(based on its minimum radius of gyration) between
consecutive points where the lacing is attached should
not exceed 50. The maximum slenderness of the strut as
a whole should not be taken as less than 1.4Xc.
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four
(h) The effective length of a lacing should be taken as
the distance between the inner end welds or fasteners for
single intersection lacing and as 0.7 times this distance
for double intersection lacing connected by welds or
fasteners at the intersection. The slenderness of a lacing
should not exceed 180.
(i) The lacings and their connections should be designed
to carry the forces induced by a transverse shear at any
point in the length of the member equal to not less than
2.5 %of the maximum axial load in the member, divided
equally amongst all transverse lacing systems in parallel
planes. For members carrying bending stresses calculated
from eccentricity of loading, applied end moments or
lateral loading, the lacing should be proportioned to
resist any shear due to bending in addition to the above
mentioned value of not less than 2.5 %.
4. 7.9 Battened struts
A battened strut consisting of two or more main components
may be designed as a single integral member, provided that
the following conditions are met.
(a) The main components are effectively restrained
against buckling by a system of battens consisting of
plates or sections, so connected to the main components
as to form with them an effectively rigid jointed frame.
(b) Battens are positioned opposite each other in each
plane at the ends of the member and at points where it is
laterally restrained. Intermediate battens should be
positioned opposite each other and be spaced and
proportioned uniformly throughout the length of a
member.
(c) The maximum slenderness, A.c, of a main component
(based on its minimum radius of gyration) between end
welds or end fasteners of adjacent battens should not
exceed 50. The slenderness of the battened strut, Ab,
about the axis perpendicular to the plane of the battens
should be calculated from:
Ab = (Am 2 + Ac 2) rh
where
Am is the ratio LE/r of a whole member about that
axis;
Ac is as defined above.
The maximum slenderness of the battened strut about
the axis perpendicular to the plane of the battens should
not be taken as less than 1.4Ac-
(d) The thickness of plate battens should be not less
than 1/50 of the minimum distances between welds or
fasteners. The slenderness of sections used as battens
should not exceed 180. The width of an end batten
along the axis of the main components should be not
less than the distance between centroids of the main
members and not less than half this distance for inter·
mediate battens. Further, the width of any batten
should be not less than twice the width of the narrower
main component.
(e) The battens and the connections between them and
the main components should be designed to carry the
forces and moments induced by a transverse shear at any
68
point in the length of a member equal to not less than
2.5% of the maximum factored axial load in the member.
For members carrying bending stresses calculated from
eccentricity of loading, applied end moments or lateral
loads, the battens should be proportioned to resist any
shear due to bending in addition to the above mentioned
value of not less than 2.5 %.
NOTE. For battened angle members see 4.7.11 or 4. 7.12 as
appropriate.
4.7.10 Angles, channels and T-section struts
4.7.10.1 General. For struts composed of angles, channels
and T-sections, the eccentricity of normal end connections
may be ignored and the strut designed as an axially loaded
member provided that the conditions of 4.7.10.2 to
4.7.10.5 are met.
Alternatively, in the internal bays of continuous struts, such
as those forming the legs of towers or the compression
flanges of lattice girders, the effective length may be deter·
mined from 4.7.2 and table 24.
The length L should be taken as the distance between the
intersection of centroidal axes or the intersections of the
setting out lines of the bolts, and r is the radius of gyration
about the relevant axis. Axes are defined in table 28.
Intermediate restraints may be allowed for in determining
the relevant length L for buckling about each axis, provided
they Iie at an angle of not more than 45 o to the plane of
buckling considered.
4.7.10.2 Single angle struts. For a single angle connected
by one leg to a gusset, or directly to another member, by:
(a) two or more fasteners in line along the angle at each
end or by an equivalent welded connection, the slender-
ness A should be taken as the greatest of:
(1)0.85Lvvfrvv but;;;.Q.7Lvvlrvv+15;
(2) 1.0Laa1raa but;;;.0.7Laa1raa + 30;
(3) 0.85Lbb/rbb but;;;;. 0.7Lbb/rbb + 30;
(b) a single fastener at each end, the compression
resistance should be taken as 80 % of the compression
resistance of an axially loaded member and the slender-
ness A should be taken as the greatest of:
(1) 1.0Lvvfrvv but;;;.0.7Lvvfrvv+ 15;
(2) 1.0Laa/raa but;;;;. 0.7 Laalraa + 30;
(3) 1.0Lbb/rbb but;;;;. 0.7Lbb/rbb + 30;
4.7.10.3 Double angle struts. For double angle struts inter-
connected back-to-back as recommended in 4.7.13 or
battened as recommended in 4.7.12 and connected at each
end by one leg of each angle to a gusset, or directly to
another member, as follows:
(a) to one side of a gusset or member at each end by two
or more fasteners in line along each angle or by an equiv-
alent weld, the slenderness A should be taken as the
greater of:
(1) 1.0Lxx/rxx but;;;.0.7Lxxlrxx+30;
(2) [(0.85Lyylryyl 2 +A/]Y2 but;;;.1.4Ac;

(b) to one side of a gusset or member at each end by one
fastener in each angle, the slenderness A. should be taken
as the greater of:
(1) 1.0Lxxlrxx but;;.0.7Lxxlrxx +30;
(2) [(1.0Lyyfryyl 2 +A./]'~> but;;;. 1.4A.c;
(c) to both sides of a gusset or member at each end by
two or more fasteners in line along the angles, the
slenderness A. should be taken as the greater of:
( 1) 0.85L xxlr xx but;;;. 0.7L xxlr xx + 30;
(2) [(L YY /r YY )2 +A. c 2 ]% but;;.1.4A.c;
(d) to both sides of a gusset or member at each end by a
single fastener through each angle, the compression
resistance should be taken as 80 % of the compression
resistance of an axially loaded member and the slender-
ness A. should be taken as the greater of:
(1) 1.0Lxxlrxx but;;.0.7Lxxlrxx +30;
(2)[(L YY /r YY )2 +'!1. c 2 ]% but;;.1.4A.c;
In (a) to (d) Ac = Lvvlrvv with Lvv measured between inter-
connecting fasteners for back-to-back struts or between end
welds or end fasteners of adjacent battens for battened angle
struts.
4.7.10.4 Single channel struts. For a single channel conn-
ected only by its web to a gusset, or directly to another
member, by:
(a) two or more rows of fasteners arranged symmetrically
across the web at each end, or an equivalent welded
connection, the slenderness A. should be taken as the
greater of:
(1) 0.85Lxx/r xx;
(2) 1.0Lyylryy but;;.0.7Lyylryy +30;
(b) two or more fasteners arranged symmetrically in a
single row across the web at each end, or an equivalent
welded connection, the slenderness A. should be taken as
the greater of:
(1) 1.0Lxxlrxx;
(2) 1.0Lyylryy but;;;. 0.7Lyylryy + 30;
4.7.10.5 Single T-section struts. For a singleT-section
connected only by its flange to a gusset, or directly to
another member, by:
(a) two or more rows of fasteners arranged symmetrically
across the flange at each end, or an equivalent welded
connection, the slenderness A. should be taken as the
greater of:
(1) 1.0Lxxlrxx but;;.0.7Lxxlrxx +30;
(2) 0.85Lyylryy;
(b) two or more fasteners arranged symmetrically in a
single row across the flange at each end, or an equivalent
welded connection, the slenderness A. should be taken as
the greater of:
(1) 1.0Lxx/rxx but;;.0.7Lxx/rxx + 30;
(2) 1.0Lyyfryy;
69
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four
4.7 .11 Batten-starred angle struts
A battened strut of cruciform section may be designed as a
single integral member provided that it meets the conditions
given in 4.7 .9 except as follows.
(a) Battens should be connected to the backs of angles
parallel to both the rectangular axes of the member.
They should alternate in each plane and the effective
length of a main component should be taken as the
spacing centre-to-centre ofthe battens in the same plane.
(b) The transverse shear of not less than 2.5% of the
factored axial load should be taken as acting perpendi-
cular to the minor axis of the member. The battens in
each plane should be designed for the components of
this shear resolved perpendicular to the rectangular
axes plus any transverse shear due to the weight or wind
resistance of the member.
4.7 .12 Battened parallel angle struts
A battened parallel angle strut composed of two similar
angles arranged symmetrically with their corresponding
rectangular axes aligned may be designed as a single integral
member providing that in all other respects it meets the
conditions given in 4.7 .9.
The eccentricity of end connections should be allowed for
as recommended in 4.7.10.3.
4. 7.13 Back-to-back struts
4.7.13.1 Components separated. A strut composed of two
angles, channels or T-sections, separated back-to-back by a
distance not exceeding that required for the end gusset
connection, may be designed as a single integral member
provided the following conditions are met.
(a) The main components should be of similar cross
section with their corresponding rectangular axes aligned.
(b) The main components should be interconnected by
fasteners. Where the components are connected together
by welding the member should be designed as a battened
strut as given in 4.7.9.
(c) The member should not be subjected to transverse
loads perpendicular to the connected surfaces other than
the weight or the wind resistance of the member.
(d) The slenderness, A., of the compound strut about
the axis parallel to the connected surfaces should be
calculated from 4.7.9(c) for battened struts.
(e) The main components should be connected at
intervals so that the member is divided into at least three
bays of approximately equal length. At the ends of the
member the main components should be interconnected
by not less than two fasteners along each line along the
length of the member.
(f) The interconnecting fasteners should be designed to
transmit the longitudinal shear between the main
components induced by a transverse shear 0 at any
point in the member; Q should be taken as not less than
2.5% of the factored axial compression in the member
plus any load due to self weight or wind resistance of
the member. In no case should the fasteners be less
than 16 mm in diameter.
 cno:~
Table 28. Angle, channel and T-section struts ~en
:::!". (J'1
OID
:::3CJ'1
Clause Connection Sections and axes Slenderness ratios _o
(see notes 1 and 2) 0 ..
c:
.....
"'0
!))

4.7.10.2(a) .....
vv axis: 0.85Lvvf'vv but~ 0.7Lvvlrvv + 15 .-+

aa axis: 1.0L 88 /r aa but~ 0.7 L88 /r88 + 30

bb axis: 0.85L bb/'bb but~ 0.7 Lbb/rbb + 30

4.7.10.2(b) vv axis: 1.0Lvvf'vv but~0.7Lvvlrvv + 15

aa axis: 1.0L 88 /raa but;;;. 0. 7 L88 /raa + 30
@5 bb axis: 1.0Lbb/rbb but~ 0.7Lbb/rbb + 30
(see note 3) (see note 3)

X
4.7.10.3(a) xxaxis: 1.0Lxxlrxx but~0.7Lxxlrxx +30
I

_L~_L
yy axis: [!0.85Lyy/r YY ) 2 + Xc 2 ]'12 but~ 1.4;\.c

-...J
0 8
(see note 4)
X
I
(see note 5)

4.7.10.3(b) XX axis: 1.0Lxxl'xx but;;;. 0.7Lxxlrxx + 30

{i5
(see note 4)
yy axis: [!Lyylr YY ) 2 +X/]'!. but;;;. 1.4;\.c
(see note 5)

4.7.10.3(c) xx axis: 0.85L xxlr xx but~ 0.7 L xxlr xx + 30

~ ._±~L+~ yy axis: [!Lyylryyl 2 +X/ J'h but~ 1.4;\.c

(see note 5)
~ IY
(see note 4) IY

4.7.10.3(d) IY xx axis: 1.0Lxxlr xx but~ 0.7 Lxxlr xx + 30

IY I
yy axis: [!Lyylryyl 2 + Ac 2 ]'!. but;;;.1.4Xc
@5 !.-T-'=T-~ (see notes 3 and 5)

(see notes 3 and 4) ~ 1Y

 Table 28 (continued)

Clause Connection Sections and axes Slenderness ratios

(see notes 1 and 2)

Ltl
4.7.10.4(a) xx axis: 0.85 L x xlr xx

tp
I ••
I •• :
I
IY
yy axis: 1.0Lyyfr YY but;;:;. 0.7 Ly/'vY + 30

4.7.10.4(b) XX axis: 1.0Lxxfrxx

iY

tJ -'- ~--'-
yy axis: 1.0 Lyylryy but;;:;. 0.7Lyylr YY + 30

e
4.7.10.5(a)
IX XX axis:1.0Lxxlrxx but;;;.0.7Lxxlrxx + 30

-....!
Y-~-Y yy axis:0.85Lyylryy

..... lx

4.7.10.5(b)
IX
xx axis: 1.0Lxx/'xx but;;;.0.7Lxx/rxx + 30

l95 Y-~-Y
lx
yy axis: 1.0Lyylryy

NOTE 1. The length L is taken between the intersections of the centroidal axes or the intersections of the setting out lines of the bolts, irrespective of whether
the strut is connected to a gusset or directly to another member.
NOTE 2. Intermediate lateral restraints reduce the value of L for buckling about the relevant axes. For single angle members, Lw is taken between lateral
restraints perpendicular to either aa or bb. (/)OJ
NOTE 3. For single or double angles connected by one bolt, the compression resistance is also reduced to 80% of that for an axially loaded member, see ~(/')
4.7.10.2(b) and 4.7.10.3(dl. ~. 0'1
0co
NOTE 4. Double angles are either battened (see 4. 7.12) or interconnected back-to-back (see 4.7.13). Battens or interconnecting fasteners are also needed at the ::J 0'1
ends of members.
_o
0
NOTE 5. \: = Lvvlrvv with Lvv measured between interconnecting fasteners for back-to-back struts or between end welds or end fasteners of adjacent battens for c: "
.., Ql
battened angle struts. ;:::!.
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four
The longitudinal shear per interconnection should be
taken as 0.250~, where Ac is the slenderness of the
main component centre-to-centre of interconnections.
(g) At all interconnections the fasteners should pass
through solid steel packings, washers or gussets. In struts
at least two fasteners should be provided in line across
the width of all members that are sufficiently wide to
accommodate them.
4.7.13.2 Components in contact. A strut composed of two
angles, channels or T-sections in contact back-to-back or
separated by continuous steel packing may be designed as a
single integral member providing that the following
conditions are met.
(a) The main components should be similar sections
arranged symmetrically with their corresponding
rectangular axes aligned.
(b) Interconnection should be as follows.
(1) When interconnection is by means of fasteners at
least two fasteners should be provided in line across
the width of the member providing it is sufficiently
wide. The spacing of the fasteners should not exceed
300 mm or 32t where tis the thickness of the thinner
part joined.
(2) When interconnection is by means of welds both
pairs of edges of the main components should be
welded. The spacing centre-to-centre of interconnec-
tions should be taken as the spacing centre-to-centre
of consecutive effective lengths of weld on the same
edge. The space between consecutive welds on the
same edge should not exceed 300 mm or 16t where t
is the minimum thickness of the parts joined.
(c) The member should not be subject to transverse load
perpendicular to the connected surfaces other than the
weight or wind resistance of the member.
(d) The slenderness, X, of the compound strut about the
axis parallel to the connected surfaces should be
calculated from 4.7.9(c).
(e) The main components should be connected at
intervals so that the member is divided into at least three
bays of approximately equal length. At the ends of the
member the main components should be interconnected
by not less than two fasteners in each Iine along the
length of the- member, or by equivalent welds.
(f) The interconnecting welds or fasteners should be
designed to transmit the longitudinal shear between the
components as given in 4.7 .13.1 (f).
(g) In members exposed to the weather or other corrosive
influences the components should be connected by
continuous welds, or fasteners as laid down in 6.2.4.
4.8 Axially loaded members with moments
4.8.1 General
Members should comply with 4.2 to 4.7 inclusive, covering
the treatment of members subject to moments and axial
loads applied separately, in addition to the recommend-
ations given in 4.8.2 and 4.8.3.
72
Moments in angle, channel and T-section members due to
eccentricity of connections may be treated as recommended
in 4.6.3 for tension members or 4.7.10 for struts.
4.8.2 Tension members with moments
Tension members with moments should be checked for
resistance to lateral-torsional buckling in accordance with
4.3 under moment alone. They should also be checked
for capacity under the combined effects of axial load and
moment at the points of greatest bending moments and
axial loads, usually at the ends.
The following relationship should be satisfied:
F Mx My
--+ +-- ,;:;;,
AePy Mcx Mcy
where
F is the applied axial load in member;
A9 is the effective area (see 3.3.3);
Py is the design strength;
Mx is the applied moment about the major axis at
critical region;
Mcx is the moment capacity about the major axis in the
absence of axial load (see 4.2.5 and 4.2.6);
My is the applied moment about the minor axis at
critical region;
Mcy is the moment capacity about the minor axis in the
absence of axial load (see 4.2.5 and 4.2.6).
Alternatively for greater economy in plastic or compact
cross sections only the following relationship should be
satisfied.
( ~)z,
M,x
where
M,x is the reduced moment capacity about the major
axis in the presence of axial load obtained from
published tables;
M,y is the reduced moment capacity about the minor
axis in the presence of axial load obtained from
published tables;
z1 is a constant taken as:
2.0 for I and H sections;
2.0 for solid and hollow circular sections;
5/3 for solid and hollow rectangular sections;
1.0 for all other cases.
z2 is a constant taken as:
1.0 for I and H sections;
2.0 for solid and hollow circular sections;
5/3 for solid and hollow rectangular sections;
1.0 for all other cases.
4.8.3 Compression members with moments
4.8.3.1 General. Compression members should be checked
for local capacity at the points of greatest bending moment
and axial load (usually at the ends). This capacity may be
limited either by yielding or local buckling depending on
the section properties. The member should also be checked
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

for overall buckling by either the simplified or more exact where

approach. Mcx is the moment capacity about the major axis
4.8.3.2 Local capacity check. The appropriate relationship obtained from 4.2.5 or 4.2.6;
given below should be satisfied. Mcy is the moment capacity about the minor axis
(a) For semi-compact and slender cross sections (and as obtained from 4.2.5 or 4.2.6 but not subject to
an alternative simplified approach for plastic or compact the restriction Me~ 1.2pyZ;
cross sections): Pcx is the compression resistance about the major
F Mx My axis;
--+--+-- ~1
Pcy is the compression resistance about the minor
A 9 Py Mcx Mcy
axis.
NOTE. For slender cross sections a reduced effective value of Py
should be used in accordance with 3.6. NOTE. In cases where Mx or My approaches zero the more exact
approach may be more conservative than the simplified approach.
(b) For plastic and compact cross sections: In such situations the values satisfying the simplified approach may
be used.
+ (My )z2 ~1
Mry
where for (a) and (b) A 9 is the gross cross-sectional area and
4.9 Members with biaxial moments
other notations are as given in 4.8.2. Members subject to biaxial moments in the absence of both
tensile and compressive axial forces may be designed in
4.8.3.3 Overall buckling check
accordance with the rules given in 4.8.3, with the value ofF
4.8.3.3.1 Simplified approach. The following relationship taken as zero.
should be satisfied:
F mMx mMy 4.1 0 Empirical design rules for members
--+--+-- ~1
A 9 Pc Mb PyZy in lattice frames and trusses
where
This clause is applicable to the design of lattice frames and
F is the applied axial load in the member;
trusses except where fatigue is a design consideration.
Pc is the compressive strength;
Generally it may be assumed that secondary stresses will
Ag is the gross cross-sectional area; be insignificant if the slenderness of the chord members
m is the equivalent uniform moment factor obtained in the plane of the truss is greater than 50 and that of most
from table 18; of the web members is greater than 1 00.
Mb is the buckling resistance moment capacity (about The following assumptions may be made.
major axis) (see 4.3.7); (a) For the purpose of calculating the forces in the
Zy is the elastic section modulus about the minor axis; member the connections are pinned.
Py is the design strength. (b) For the purpose of calculating the effective length of
members the fixity of the connections and the rigidity
4.8.3.3.2 More exact approach. The following relationship of adjacent members may be taken into account.
should be satisfied.
(c) Where the exact position of point loads relative to
mMx mMy the connection of the rafter to the web members is not
--+--~1
Max May known the local bending moment may be taken as equal
where to:

Max is the maximum buckling moment about the major WL

axis in the presence of axial load, taken to be the 6
lesser of: (d) Ties to chords should be properly connected to an
adequate restraint system.

or (e) The length of chord members may be taken as the

0.5F) distance between connection to the web members in
(1 +
Pcx plane and the distance between longitudinal ties or
purl ins out of plane.
Mb ( 1 - _!__)
Pcy
governing lateral/torsional buckling; (f) Purl ins in light frames and trusses need not be
checked for compressive stresses originating from their
May is the maximum buckling moment about the minor function as restraints.
axis in the presence of axial load taken as:
(g) Where the sheeting spans from truss to truss in the
absence of purl ins the stability of the rafter should be
considered and the sheeting should be adequately fixed.

~1 + -0.5F)
This method of providing restraint to the rafter should
- only be used where the loading is mainly roof loading.
Pcy

73
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

4.11 Additional provisions for IR is the second moment of area of the crane rail about
its horizontal centroidal axis;
gantry girders
K R is a constant taken as:
4.11, 1 General
(a) when the crane rail is mounted directly on the
In addition to the general rules for beams given in 4.2 to 4.5 beam flange K R = 3.25;
gantry girders should fulfil the conditions given in 4. 11.2
(b) where a suitable resilient pad not less than 5 mm
to 4.11.6.
thick is interposed between the crane rail and the
Gantry girders should be designed to resist factored loading beam flange K R = 4.0.
as given in 2.2.3 and 2.4.1.
The stress obtained by dispersing the load over this length
4. 11.2 Crabbing of trolley should not be greater than Pyw.
Gantry girders intended to carry cranes of loading class 01
4.11.6 Welded girders
and 02 as defined in BS 2573 : Part 1 need not be designed
for the effects of crabbing action. Welds should be continuous throughout. Top flange welds
should preferably be full penetration butt welds and should
Gantry girders intended to carry cranes of class 03 and 04
be checked for the effects of local compression, see 4.11.5,
as defined in BS 2573 : Part 1 should be designed for the in addition to all other effects. It should be assumed that
following couple due to crabbing action. This couple need this force is wholly transmitted by the welds to the web.
not be combined with the horizontal loads obtained
from 2.2.3. The couple is due to the crabbing action of two
wheels or bogies comprising two equal and opposite forces, 4.12 Purl ins and side rails
F R, acting transverse to the rail, one at each end of the
4.12.1 General
wheelbase.
Purl ins and side rails may be designed on the assumption
LcWw Ww
FR = - - b u t ; ; . - - that the cladding provides lateral restraint to an angle
40aw 20 section, or to the face against which it is connected in the
where case of other sections. In both cases, the type of cladding
Lc is the span of the crane; and its fixings should be such that it is capable of acting in
this manner.
Ww is the factored maximum load on a wheel or bogie
pivot;
4.12.2 Deflections
aw is the distance between the centres of the two end The deflections of purlins and side rails should be limited to
wheels or between the pivots of the bogies (where
suit the characteristics of the particular cladding system.
horizontal guide rails are used aw is the wheelbase of
the guide rails).
4.12.3 Wind loading
4.11.3 Lateral torsional buck Iing Wind loading should be determined in accordance with
No account should be taken of the effect of moment CP 3 : Chapter V : Part 2. The effects of local pressures
gradient, i.e. nand m should be taken as 1.0 (see 4.3). need not be considered in the design of the purl ins and side
rails.
4.11.4 Shear buck Iing
The shear buckling resistance should be calculated without 4.12.4 Empirical design of purlins and side rails
using tension field action (see 4.4.5.3). 4.12.4.1 General. As an alternative to other methods of
design, purl ins and side rails fabricated from hot rolled
4. 11.5 Local compression under wheels angles or hollow sections may be designed in accordance
Local compression on the web may be obtained by with empirical rules given in 4.12.4.3 or 4.12.4.4. Purlins
distributing the crane wheel load over a length xR where: and side rails fabricated from cold formed sections should
XR = 2(HR + T) be designed in accordance with BS 5950 : Part 5.
where 4.12.4.2 General rules for empirical design
HR is the rail height; (a) The members should be of steel to a minimum of
T is the flange thickness. grade 43 of BS 4360.
Alternatively where the properties of the rail are known: (b) Unfactored loads should be considered for empirical
design, i.e. effectively 'Yt = 1.0.
If+ IR)l/3
XR =KR ( - - - (c) The span of the members should not exceed 6.5 m
t
centre-to-centre of main supports.
where
(d) Where the members generally span only one bay each
t is the web thickness; member should be connected by at least two fasteners at
11 is the second moment of area of the flange about its each end.
horizontal centroidal axis; (e) Where the members are generally continuous over
two or more bays, with staggered joints in adjacent lines

74
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

of members, at least one end of any single bay members
should be connected by not less than two fasteners.
4.12.4.3 Specific rules for the empirical design of pur/ins
(a) Slope. The slope of the roof should not exceed 30 °.
(b) Loading
(1) The loading on the purl in should be substantially
uniformly distributed. Not greater than 10% of the
total roof load on the member should be due to other
types of load.
(2) Imposed load should be determined as recom-
mended in 2.2, but should not be taken as less than
0.75 kN/m 2 •
(d) Dimensions. The dimension D of the member
perpendicular to the plane of the cladding and the
dimension 8 parallel to the plane of the cladding should
be not less than the values given in table 30, except that
when Z 1 is greater than the minimum value from
table 30, the minimum value of D may be reduced in
the same proportion. However, in no case should D be
less than B.
Table 30. Empirical values for side rails
Side rail Z, (min.) z, (min.) D 8
section

(c) Elastic modulus. The elastic modulus, Z, of a purl in cm 3 cm 3 mm mm

about its axis parallel to the plane of the cladding should
W1 L W2 L
be not less than the values given in table 29. Angle L/45 L/60
1800 1200
(d) Dimensions. The dimension D of the member
perpendicular to the plane of the cladding, and, where
applicable, the dimension 8 parallel to the plane of the WI L W2 L
cladding should be not less than the values given in
CHS L/65 -
2000 1350
table 29.
W1 L W2L
Table 29. Empirical values for purl ins RHS L/70 L/100
1800 1200
Purlin section Z(min.) D 8
W 1 , W 2 are the total unfactored loads on one span of the side
rail, acting perpendicular to and parallel to the plane
cm 3 mm mm of the cladding respectively (in kNI.
WpL L is the span of the rail (in mm), taken as:
Angle L/45 L/60
1800 (a) for Z 1 and D: the span centre-to-centre of main
supports.
(b) for Z 2 and 8: the span centre-to-centre of main
WpL
CHS L/65 - supports OR where properly supported sag rods are
2000 provided, the spacing of the sag rods.

WpL
RHS L/70 L/150
1800
Wp is the total unfactored load on one span of the purl in
(in kNI due to either (dead+ imposed) or (wind -dead)
whichever is the greater.
L is the length-centre-to-centre of main (vertical) supports,
but where properly supported sag rods are provided,
may be taken as the sag rod spacing for the determination
of 8 only (in mm).
4.12.4.4 Specific rules for empirical design of side rails
(a) Slope. The slope of the cladding should not exceed
15 a from the vertical.
(b) Loading. Side rails should not generally be subjected
to loads other than wind load and the self weight of the
cladding. Not more than 10% of the total load on the
member about the axis under consideration should be
due to loading from other sources or due to loads which
are not uniformly distributed. Notwithstanding the
above, side rails may be used to provide restraint to
their supporting members.
(c) Section moduli. The elastic section moduli, Z 1 and
Z 2 , of the side rail about its axes parallel to and
perpendicular to the plane of the cladding respectively
should be not less than the values given in table 30.
4.13 Column bases
4.13.1 General
Column bases should be of sufficient size, stiffness and
strength to transmit the axial load, bending moments and
shear forces in columns to their foundations or other
support without exceeding the load carrying capacity of
such supports.
The nominal bearing pressure between the baseplate and
the support may be determined on the basis of a linear
distribution of pressure. For concrete foundations the
bearing strength may be taken as 0.4fcu where feu is the
characteristic concrete cube strength at 28 days.
Baseplates may be designed either by the empirical method
given in 4.13.2 or by other rational means.
The connection of the column to the baseplate should
comply with 4.13.3.
Baseplates of grade 43A steel subject to compression only
should not be limited in thickness by the brittle fracture
requirements. Grade 43A baseplates transmitting moments
to the foundation should not exceed 50 mm unless special
consideration is given to brittle fracture.

75
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four
4.13.2 Empirical design of baseplates
4.132.1 Oversized baseplates. When the size of a baseplate
is more than the minimum required, any portion of its area
may be taken as ineffective, provided that the bearing
pressure calculated on the remaining effective area does not
exceed the bearing strength.
4.13.2.2 Concentric forces. If a rectangular plate is loaded
concentrically by I, H, channel, box or RHS, its minimum
thickness should be:·
112
t = [ 2 '5 w(a 2 - 0.3b 2 )]
Pyp
but not less than the flange thickness of the column
supported, where:
a is the greater projection of the plate beyond the
column;
b is the lesser projection of the plate beyond the
column;
w is the pressure on the underside of the plate
assuming a uniform distribution;
Pyp is the design strength of the plate (from 3.1.1 or
table 6) but not greater than 270 N/mm 2 •
If gussets are used for transmitting forces to the baseplate,
the projecting distances, a and b, are measured from the
extremities of the gussets, provided that the gussets are
designed for the resulting forces (see 4.13.2.4).
For solid round or hollow columns, where loading on the
cap or under the base is uniformly distributed over the
whole area including the column shaft, the minimum
thickness (in mm) of a square or circular cap or baseplate
should be:
lh
t = r~ Dp(Dp- 0.9D)]
2.4Pyp .
where
DP is the length of the side or diameter of cap or
baseplate, not less than 1.5 (D + 75) mm;
D is the diameter of the column.
4.13.2.3 Eccentric forces and non-rectangular plates. If the
bearing pressure beneath a baseplate is not uniform, or if
the baseplate is not rectangular, calculations should be
carried out to determine the bending moments in the
baseplate. The maximum moment should not exceed
1.2PypZ (pYP ~ 270 N/mm 2 ) whereZ is the elastic modulus
of the baseplate.
4.13.2.4 Gussets. In a stiffened base, the moment in a
gusset due to the bearing pressure on the effective area used
in the design of the baseplate should not exceed PygZ
where
Z is the elastic modulus of the gusset;
Pyg is the design strength of the gusset~ 270 N/mm 2 .
When the effective area of the baseplate is less than its gross
area, the connections of the gussets should be checked for
the effects of a nominal distribution of bearing pressure on
the gross area as well as for the effects of the distribution
used in the design of the baseplate.
76
4.13.3 Connection of baseplates
Provided that the contact areas on the baseplate and the
end of the column (including, in stiffened bases, the contact
surfaces on the stiffeners) are in tight bearing contact,
compression may be transmitted to the baseplate in direct
bearing. Welds or fasteners should be provided to transmit
any shear or tension developed at the connection due to all
realistic combinations of factored loads (see 2.2.1).
Where the contact surfaces are not suitable to transmit
compression in direct bearing, welds or fasteners should be
provided to transmit all forces and moments.
4.14 Cased sections
4.14.1 General
As an alternative to the method given in BS 5950: Section
3.2*, a section encased in concrete may be designed by the
empirical method presented in 4.14.2, 4.14.3 or 4.14.4 as
appropriate, provided that it meets the following conditions.
(a) The steel section is either a single rolled or fabricated
I or H-section with equal flanges or two similar rolled
channel sections in contact back-to-back or separated
back-to-back by not less than 20 mm nor more than half
their depth; double channel sections should meet the
conditions of 4.7.13.2 if in contact, otherwise they
should be laced or battened to meet the conditions
of 4.7 .8 or 4.7 .9 respectively.
(b) The overall dimensions of the steel section does not
exceed 1000 mm x 500 mm, the dimension of 1000 mm
being measured parallel to the web or webs.
(c) Primary structural connections to the member should
preferably be made directly to the steel section. In such
cases the eccentricity given in 4.7 .6(a) should be taken
from the face of the steel section.
(d) The steel section is unpainted and free from oil,
grease, dirt, or loose rust and millscale.
(e) The steel section is solidly encas~d in ordinary dense
structural concrete of at least grade 20 to BS 8110.
(f) There is a minimum rectangle of solid casing, which
may be chamfered at the corners and provides a cover to
the outer face and edges of the steel of not less than
50mm.
(g) The concrete casing extends the full length of the
member and connections. Concrete is thoroughly
compacted especially in areas under cleats, cap plates
and beam soffits. Sufficient clearance is provided at all
points so that the concrete can be efficiently worked
around the steel elements.
(h) The casing is reinforced using steel fabric complying
with BS 4483, reference 098. Alternatively, steel
reinforcement or wire of not less than 5 mm diameter or
their equivalent, complying with BS 4449 or BS 4482
may be used at a maximum spacing of 200 mm to form
a cage of closed links and longitudinal bars.
*In preparation.
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four

The reinforcement is so arranged as to pass through the

centre of the concrete cover of the flanges; the minimum
lap of the reinforcement, and the details of the links,
should comply with BS 8110.
(i) The effective length, L E , of the cased section is
limited to 40bc, 100bc2 Ide or 250r whichever is least,
where
be is the minimum width of solid casing within the
depth of the steel section;
where
Ac is the gross sectional area of the concrete,
but neglecting any casing in excess of 75 mm
from the overall dimensions of the steel section
and neglecting any applied finish;
A 9 is the gross sectional area of the steel strut;

de is the minimum depth of solid casing within the feu is the characteristic concrete cube strength at
width of the steel section; 28 days of the encasement but~ 40 N/mm 2 ;
r is the minimum radius of gyration of the steel Pc is the compressive strength of the steel section
section alone. determined as given in 4.7.5 using and'v 'x
as
defined in (a) and taking Pv ~ 355 N/mm 2 ;
4.14.2 Cased members subject to bending Pv is the design strength of the steel ~ 355 N/mm 2 •
Cased beams which meet the conditions given in 4.14.1 4.14.4 Cased members subject to axial load and moment
should be designed as for an uncased section (see 4.2 A cased section meeting the conditions given in 4.14.1 and
and 4.3) except that the radius of gyration, rv, may be subject to combined axial compression and bending moment
taken as 0.2(8 + 100) mm or 'v of the uncased section should satisfy the following relationships.
whichever is greater. All other properties should be taken as
(a) For capacity:
for the uncased section. The buckling resistance moment,
Mb, should not exceed 1Y. times that permitted for the Fe Mx Mv
-+--+--~1
uncased section, where 8 is the width of the flange. Pes Mcx Mev
In the calculation of deflections, the effective moment of (b) For buckling resistance:
inertia of the cased section may be taken to be that of the Fe mMx mMv
steel section plus the transformed net area of the concrete, -+--+--~1
i.e.: Pc Mb Mev
where
lc- Is
lcs = I s + - - - Fe is the compressive force due to axial load;
O!e
Pc is the compression resistance (see 4.14.3);
where
Pes is the short strut capacity (i.e. the compression
lcs is the second moment of area of cased section;
resistance of a cased strut of zero slenderness);
15 is the second moment of area of steel section;
Mx is the applied moment about the major axis;
Ic is the second moment of area of gross concrete
Mv is the applied moment about the minor axis;
section;
m is the equivalent uniform moment factor
0! 8 is the modular ratio.
obtained from table 18;
4.14. 3 Cased struts
Mcx is the major axis moment capacity of the steel
Cased struts which meet the conditions given in 4.14.1 section (see 4.2.5 or 4.2.6);
may be designed on the following basis.
Mev is the minor axis moment capacity of the steel
(a) The radius of gyration, r v, of the member about its section (see 4.2.5 or 4.2.6);
axis in the plane of its web or webs should be taken
Mb is the buckling resistance moment obtained
as 0.2bc, but not more than 0.2(8 + 150) mm where be
from 4.3.7.3 using section properties as given
is the minimum width of solid casing within the depth of
in 4.14.2.
the steel section and 8 is the overall width of the steel
flange or flanges. Where the radius of gyration of the
steel section alone is greater than that of the composite 4.15 Web openings
section, the radius of gyration of the steel section alone
may be used. 4.15. 1 General
The radius of gyration,'"' of the member about its axis Except as provided for in 3.3 for holes for fasteners,
parallel to the planes of the flanges should be taken as the effects of openings should be considered in the design.
that of the steel section alone. At all points where the applied shear or moment at the net
section exceeds the capacity of the member adequate
(b) The compression resistance, Pc, of the cased section reinforcement should be provided.
should be determined from:
Members should comply with 4.2 to 4.4 as appropriate
Pc = ( A 9 + 0.45 P;
feu
Ac )
Pc but not greater than and 4.5. In addition they should comply with 4.15.2
or 4.15.3 as appropriate.
the short strut capacity given by:

77
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section four
4. 15.2 Sections other than castellated
4.15.2.1 General. Where holes occur which will affect the
strength of the member, consideration should be given to
the clauses which apply to castellated beams.
4.15.2.2 Unreinforced circular openings. Unreinforced
circular openings may be located in the webs of compact
beams and girders without considering net section properties
provided that:
(a) the load on the member is substantially uniformly
distributed and point loads should not be situated within
a distance equal to the depth of the member from the
centre line of the hole nor should they generate a shear
in the web greater than 10 %of the shear resistance of
the section;
(b) the section has an axis of symmetry in the plane of
bending;
(c) the openings are located within the middle third of
the depth and the middle half of the span of the member;
(d) the spacing between the centres of any two adjacent
openings measured parallel to the axis of the member is
a minimum of 2.5 times the diameter of the larger
opening;
(e) the factored maximum shear at the support does not
exceed 50% of the shear resistance of the section.
When the dimensions and position of openings are not in
accordance with (a) to (e). consideration should be given
to the net section properties and design should be in
accordance with 4.15.3.
4.15.2.3 Reinforced openings. Web reinforcement should
be provided adjacent to the openings to equal the cross-
sectional area of the web removed. The reinforcement
should be carried past the opening for such a distance that
the local shear stress, due to load being transferred from the
reinforcement to the web, does not exceed 0.6Py·
1.080
D is the serial de~th of the original beam.
Figure 9. Dimensions of castellated sections
78
4.15.3 Castellated beams
4.15.3.1 Types. The following rules apply to a castellated
beam of dimensions as shown in figure 9 and care should be
exercised when applying them to sections of different
dimensions.
4.15.3.2 Moment capacity. The moment capacity of the
section should be calculated from the net section properties
(see 3.3) with due allowance for the secondary vierendeel
effects of shear at the openings and the local effects of
point loads if any, at any point in the length of the beam.
4.15.3.3 Shear stress. The shear stress across the net
section of the web, and between openings should be
calculated using elastic distribution and the maximum shear
stress should not exceed 0. 7 Pv·
4.15.3.4 Incomplete lateral restraint. Beams with
incomplete lateral restraint should be designed in accordance
with 4.3 except that the equivalent slenderness, XL T,
should be calculated using the section properties applicable
to a cross section through the centreline of the opening.
4.15.3.5 Local buckling. The constituent parts of the
section should be checked for local buckling in accordance
with 3.5.
4.15.3.6 Deflection. The secondary deflections occurring
at openings should be added to the principal deflections of
the section.
4.15.3.7 Supports and concentrated loads. At points of
support and concentrated load the effects of bearing and
buckling should be considered in accordance with 4.5.
Openings except for fasteners should be filled and stiffeners
provided as necessary.
D ~ 1.50

Section five. Continuous construction
5.1 General
5.1.1 Scope
Section five applies to structures or elements of structures
which are connected by rigid joints (see 6.1.4) or are
continuous over supports. Rules are given for both elastic
and plastic methods of design.
In addition to the limitations for sway stability given in this
section it is recommended that the deflection limits given
in 2.5.1 are not exceeded.
5.1.2 Loading
5.1.2.1 Vertical load. Vertical loads should be arranged in
the most unfavourable but realistic pattern for each
element. Dead load 'Yt factors need not be varied when
considering such pattern loading, but should be varied when
considering stability against overturning.
5.1.2.2 Horizontal loads. For load cases involving
horizontal loads, pattern loading of vertical loads need
not be considered.
5.1.2.3 Notional horizontal loads. To check the sway
stability of the structure notional horizontal forces should
be applied. These notional forces may arise from practical
imperfections such as lack of verticality and should be
taken as:
0.5 %of the factored dead plus vertical imposed load
applied horizontally.
These notional forces should be assumed to act in any one
direction at a time and should be applied at each roof and
floor level or their equivalent.
The notional forces should not:
(a) be applied when considering overturning;
(b) be combined with the applied horizontal loads;
(c) be combined with temperature effects;
(d) be taken to contribute to the net reactions at the
foundations.
5.1.2.4 Base stiffness. In the analysis of all frames the
same base stiffness about the axis under consideration
should be used for all calculations. In the absence of
detailed knowledge of the foundation stiffness the following
should be assumed.
(a) Where the column is rigidly connected to a suitable
foundation the stiffness of the base should be taken as
equal to the stiffness of the column, except as in 5.7.3.1.
(b) Where the column is nominally connected to the
foundation a base stiffness of 10% of the column
stiffness may be assumed.
(c) Where an actual pin or rocker is provided the base
stiffness should be taken as zero.
5.1.3 Classification of multi-storey frames as sway or
non·sway
A multi-storey frame may be classed as non-sway (whether
or not it is braced) if its sway is such that secondary
moments due to non-verticality of columns can be neglected.
79
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section five
Sway stiffness may be provided by:
(a) an effective bracing system;
(b) the bending stiffness of the frame members;
(c) the provision of lift shafts, shear walls, etc.
A rigid jointed multi-storey frame may be considered as a
non-sway frame if in every individual storey the deflection,
b, in storey height, h, due to the notional horizontal
loading given in 5.1.2.3 satisfies the following criteria.
( 1) For clad frames where the stiffening effect of the
cladding is not taken into account in the deflection
calculations:
b<;;; _h_
2000
(2) For unclad frames or clad frames where the stiffening
effect of the cladding is taken into account in the
deflection calculations:
h
b<;;; - -
4000
A rigid jointed multi-storey frame which does not comply
with the above criteria should be classed as a sway frame,
even if it is also braced.
5.2 Elastic design
Elastic analysis should be carried out under factored loads.
5.3 Plastic design
5.3.1 General
Plastic design may be uti! ized in the design of structures or
elements of structures provided that the conditions
in 5.3.2 to 5.3.7 are met.
5.3.2 Type of loading
Plastic design may be used where loading is predominantly
static and, therefore, fatigue is not a design criterion.
5.3.3 Grades of steel
Steel complying with BS 4360 may be used. Other grades
of steel may be used provided that:
(a) the stress strain diagram has a plateau at the yield
stress extending for at least six times the yield strain;
(b) the ratio of the specified minimum ultimate tensile
strength to the specified minimum yield strength is not
less than 1 .2;
(c) the elongation (on a gauge length of 5.65y"S 0 )
is not less than 15 %, where S 0 is as given in BS 18.
5.3.4 Geometrical properties
Where plastic hinges occur in a member the proportions of
its cross section should not exceed the limiting values for
plastic design given in table 7. The cross section should be
symmetrical about its axis perpendicular to the axis of the
hinge rotation.
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section five
The cross section of members not containing plastic hinges
should be compact unless under an elastic analysis of the
frame they satisfy the recommendations of section four.
5.3.5 Restraints
Torsional restraint should be provided at a plastic hinge
location if practicable (except as in 5.5.3.1 ). Where
impracticable the restraint should be provided within a
distance of D/2 of the plastic hinge locatio11 along the
member.
Within a member containing a plastic hinge the maximum
distance Lm from the hinge restraint to an adjacent
restraint should be calculated by one of the following
methods.
(a) Conservatively Lm (in mm) may be taken as:
38ry
=
where
Lm
[1~o + (;;sf (;6 fJ 112
fc is the average compressive stress due to axial load
(in N/mm 2 );
Py is the design strength (in N/mm 2 );
ry is the radius of gyration about the minor axis
(in mm);
x is the torsional index.
Where the member has unequal flanges ry should be
taken as the lesser of the values for the compression
flange only or the whole section.
Where the cross section of the member varies within the
length Lm the minimum value of ry and the maximum
value of x should be used.
(b) The method given in appendix G taking account of
restraint to the tension flange, or the conservative
method in 5.5.3.5 may be used with the ratio of the
depth of haunch to the depth of rafter = 1 .
The spacing of restraints to member lengths not containing
a plastic hinge should be such as to satisfy the recommenda·
tions of section four. Where the restraints are placed at the
limiting distance Lm no further checks on restraint spacings
are required.
5.3.6 Stiffeners at hinge locations
Web stiffeners should be provided where a load is applied
within D/2 of a plastic hinge location which exceeds
10% of the shear capacity of the member (see 4.2.3).
The stiffener should be provided within a distance of half
the depth of the member either side of the hinge location
and be designed to carry the applied load in accordance
with 4.5.4 and 4.5.5. If the stiffeners are flat plates the
outstand to thickness ratio, b 5 /t 5 , should not exceed 9.
Where sections are used the ratib:
( /Jsos )lh should not exceed 9
where
/ 50 is the second moment of area of the stiffener about
the face of the element;
J 5 is the torsion constant of the stiffener.
80
5.3.7 Fabrication restrictions
With in a length equal to the member depth either side of a
plastic hinge location the following restrictions should be
applied to the tension flange and noted in the design
documents.
(a) Holes should be drilled or else punched 2 mm
undersize and reamed.
(b) All sheared or hand flame cut edges should be
finished smooth by grinding, chipping or planing.
These restrictions should also be applied where local yield
lines are assumed in the design of rigid connections, (see
6.1.4) and where repetition of loading makes fatigue a
design criterion (see 6.1.6).
5.4 Continuous beams
5.4.1 Elastic design
When an elastic analysis is used the capacity and buckling
resistance of the section should be calculated from section
four.
For a compact section the elastic moment diagram for each
span may be modified by up to 10% of the peak elastic
moment provided that the moments and shear remain in
equilibrium with the factored loads.
5.4.2 Plastic design
Plastic analysis may be used provided the conditions of 5.3
are met.
5.5 Portal frames
5.5.1 General
In the elastic or plastic design of portal frames attention
should be paid to the deflection of the frame at serviceability
loading.
5.5.2 Elastic design
When an elastic analysis is used the recommendations
of 5.4.1 should be applied. The stability of the frame
should be checked in accordance with 2.4.2, and the
stability of individual components checked in accordance
with section four or appendix G.
5.5.3 Plastic design
5.5.3.1 General. Plastic analysis may be used provided the
conditions of 5.3 are met. The conditions of 5.3.5 need not
be met at the last hinge to form provided it can be clearly
identified.
5.5.3.2 Sway stability. In the absence of a rigorous analysis
of frame stability the following condition should be satisfied.
The horizontal deflection, b, calculated by linear elastic
analysis at the top of any column due to the notional
horizontal loading given in 5.1.2.3 applied in the same
direction at the top of each column should not exceed
h/1000, where his the height of the column. In calculating
b allowance may be made for the restraining effect of
cladding.
 BS 5950: Part 1 1990
Section five

Irrespective of the effects of cladding this condition may be h is the column height;
satisfied provided that in each bay: lc is the minimum second moment of area of the
Lb 44 L ( p ) ( 275) column for bending in the plane of the frame (taken
D<:. n h 4 + PLr!L Pvr as zero if the column is not rigidly connected to the
rafter);
in which Lb is the effective span of the bay. When the
depth of the haunches (as shown in figure 10) is not less lr is the minimum second moment of area of the
than 2D then: rafters for bending in the plane of the frame;
Pyr is the design strength of the rafters;
Lb = L- Lh
Lr is the total developed length of the rafter;
otherwise, Lb should be taken as equal to L
n is the arching ratio Wr!W0 ;
where
wr is the factored vertical load on the rafters;
P 2/c) (L)
(f. . bay frame;
h for a smgle W0 is the maximum value of Wr which could cause
plastic failure of the rafter treated as a fixed ended
P ( ~~) (~) for a multi-bay frame; beam of span L.
5.5.3.3 Snap-through stability of rafter. In each internal
Lh is the haunch length. If the haunches at each side of bay of a multi-bay frame (i.e. greater than two bays)
the bay are different, the mean value should be taken. snap-through instability may occur due to spread of
L is the span of the bay; columns and inversion of the rafter.
D is the minimum depth of the rafters;

Depth of
haunch
I

Depth of
haunch
I

Depth of
haunch
I
* Restraint
X Restraint
or virtual restraint (see second paragraph
of 5.5.3.5.21

Figure 10. Haunch restraints

81
BS 5950: Part 1 1990
Section five

To prevent this the rafter slenderness should be such that: Depth of haunch/depth

-Lb ~ [ 22(4 + L/h)] [ 1 +-I c] [275]

-- er
tan 2
D il(il- 1) I. Pvr
where
e. for the symmetrical ridged frame is the rafter slope;
for any other roof shape:
e.= tan- 1 ( 2: 1)
where
h 1 is the height of the apex above the top of the
columns.
No limit need be placed on LID when .n ~ 1.
5.5.3.4 Column stability. At or adjacent to plastic hinge
locations the conditions of 5.3.5 should be met. In addition
the stability of the column between restraints to the
compression flange where plastic hinges do not occur
should satisfy the recommendations of section four.
Alternatively restraint to the tension flange may be taken
into account by satisfying the recommendations of
appendix G.
5.5.3.5 Rafter stability.
5.5.3.5.1 The spacing of restraints to the compression
flange as shown in figure 10 should be limited to Ls obtained
from 5.5.3.5.2 or 5.5.3.5.3 as appropriate.
NOTE. In figure 10 the restraints to the bottom flange extend at
least up to the point of contraflexure. The number of such restraints
is governed by the limiting spacing Ls.
5.5.3.5.2 Where the tension flange is restrained at intervals
such that the recommendations given in 4.8.3.3.1 (or 5.3.5
adjacent to a plastic hinge location) are satisfied when
checked using an effective length Le equal to the spacing
of the tension flange restraints, then the limiting spacing
Ls for compression flange restraints may be obtained from
(a) or (b) as follows.
(a) Provided that:
(1) the rafter is a UB section;
of rafter= 1: K 1 = 620, K 2 = 645
= 2: K 1 = 495, K2 = 515
=3: K 1 =445,K2 =465
(b) Where conditions ( 1) to (3) of alternative (a) are not
met or if the spacing of the compression flange restraints
exceeds the conservative value of L 5 given by alternative
(a), then reference should be made to appendix G.
Provided that the purlins and their connections to the rafter
are capable of providing torsional restraint to the top flange
of the rafter, a virtual lateral restraint to the bottom flange
may be assumed at the point of contraflexure. Such
torsional restraint may be assumed when conditions ( 1)
and (2) in (a) above are satisfied and in addition:
(i) every length of purlin has at least two bolts in each
purlin-to-rafter connection;
(ii) the depth of the purl in section is not less than 0.25
times the depth of the rafter.
5.5.3.5.3 If the tension flange is not restrained as described
in 5.5.3.5.2, then the limiting spacing Ls for compression
flange restraints should be such as to satisfy the recommenda-
tions given in 5.3.5 adjacent to a plastic hinge location, or
those given in 4.8.3.3.1 elsewhere.
For this restraint condition, an effective lateral restraint
to the bottom flange should not be assumed at the point
of contraflexure, unless one is specifically provided at that
point.
5.6 Multi-storey rigid frames:
elastic design
5.6.1 General
When an elastic analysis is used the conditions of 5.1 and 5.2
should be met.
In elastic design the forces and moments in the members
under vertical loading may be determined from a linear
elastic analysis of the entire frame or of suitable subframes
(see 5.6.4).

(2) the depth of the haunch is not greater than three Moments due to horizontal loads should be determined by
times the depth of the rafter; a linear elastic analysis of the whole frame.

(3) the haunch flange is not smaller than the rafter The elastic moment diagram for any member may be
flange; modified by up to 10 % of the peak elastic moment in
that member for the same combination of loads provided
then Ls may conservatively be taken as:
that:
K 1 ryx
(a) the forces and moments in the frame remain in
(nx 2 _ 104 ) 112 for grade 43 steel
equilibrium;
K 2 ryx (b) all the members in which the moments are reduced
194 x 2 _ 104 )1 12 for grade 50 steel have compact cross sections;
where (c) moments are not reduced about the minor axis of
'v is the minimum radius of gyration of the rafter any column.
section; The.capacity and buckling resistance should be determined
x is the torsional index of the rafter section; in accordance with section four.
K 1 and K 2 have the following values:
5.6.2 Non-sway frames
A frame which satisfies the conditions of 5.1.3 for non-sway
frames should be analysed using ordinary linear elastic
methods (including the use of suitable subframes).

82

The effective length of the columns may be obtained from
appendix E taking the columns as braced against sidesway.
Vertical load and horizontal loads should be applied in
accordance with 5.1.2.1 and 5.1.2.2.
5.6.3 Sway frames
A frame which does not satisfy the conditions of 5.1.3 for
non-sway frames should be designed as a sway frame.
Initially the frame should be checked under pattern vertical
loading as for a non-sway frame. For this purpose the
effective length of the columns should be obtained from
appendix E taking the columns as braced against sidesway.
The effects of sway should then be accounted for under all
combinations of loading. When considering vertical loading
in the absence of wind loads the notional horizontal loads
given in 5.1.2.3 should also be applied. Either of the
following methods may be used.
(a) Extended simple design. The effective length of the
columns in the plane of the frame should be obtained
from appendix E allowing for sidesway.
(b) Amplified sway method. The moments due to
horizontal loading should be amp Iified by the factor:
"!l.cr
("!l.cr - 1)
where Acr is the elastic critical load factor obtained from
appendix F.
The effective length of the columns in the plane of the
frame should be taken as 1.0 L.
5.6.4 Subframes
5.6.4.1 Vertical loads. In the elastic analysis of any rigid
frame the subframes shown in figure 11 may be used to
determine the forces and moments due to vertical loads.
Alternatively the beam moments may be obtained by
analysing the beams as continuous over simple supports at
the columns, the column moments being obtained from the
column design subframe in figure 11 *.
5.6.4.2 Horizontal loads. The moments due to horizontal
loads should be determined separately by means of a linear
elastic analysis of the whole frame.
5. 7 Multi-storey rigid frames:
plastic design
5. 7.1 General
Plastic design may be used provided the frame is effectively
braced against sidesway out of its own plane. The conditions
of 5.1 and 5.3 should be satisfied.
5.7.2 Non-sway frames
For the purpose of this clause a non-sway frame should
have an effective system of bracing, satisfying the criteria
of 5.1.3, independent of the bending stiffness of the frame
*Further details of subframes may be obtained from: Institution of Structural Engineers. Joint Committee Report on Fully Rigid Multi-
Storey Welded Steel Frames, Dec. 1964.
83
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section five
members. Plastic design may then be carried out providing
that the buckling resistance of the members is checked by
reference to 4.8.3.3.
5. 7.3 Sway frames
5.7 .3.1 General. Plastic design may be used where proper
allowance is made for frame instability effects. This may be
done by carrying out a full elastic-plastic sway analysis or
by using the simplified method given in 5.7.3.3. The load
factors employed should be those given in table 2.
The frame should be checked under all combinations of
loading taking the effective length of the columns in the
plane of the frame as 1.0L. When considering vertical
loading in the absence of wind load the notional horizontal
loading of 5.1.2.3 should be applied.
Where the strength of the frame is increased for any reason
the stability of the columns may be checked using the
original factored loads rather than the enhanced collapse
loads of the frame.
5.7.3.2 Pattern loading. The columns should also be
checked against pattern vertical loading using an effective
length from appendix E taking the column as braced against
sidesway.
5.7.3.3 Simple check for frame stability. The following
conditions should be satisfied.
(a) The plastic hinge mechanism should be a sway mode
with hinges assumed in all the beams and at the base of
each column but no other plastic hinges in the columns.
(b) The lower lengths of the columns should be designed
to remain elastic under the theoretical hinge moments
assumed in (a).
(c) Under all combinations of unfactored loading
(including the notional horizontal force when wind loads
are not included in the combination) it should be
possible by means of moment re-distribution to produce
sets of moments and forces throughout the frame which
are in equilibrium with the applied loads and under
which all members remain elastic.
(d) In clad frames where no account is taken of the
stiffening effect of wall panels the following relationship
should be satisfied:
(1) Acr;;;;. 4.6;
0.9"ll.cr .
(2) when 4.6,;; Acr < 10: Ap;;;;. --=-
("!l.cr - 1)'
(3) when "!l.cr;;;;. 10: "!l.p;;;;. 1;
where
Acr is the elastic critical load factor from appendix F;
A.P is the rigid-plastic load factor of the overall frames
but should not be less than 1 locally.
AP is the ratio by which each of the factored loads
would have to be increased to cause plastic collapse of
the actual frame determined in accordance with (a)
and (b).
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section five

Where the steel frame is suitably encased in concrete the (1) Acr ~ 5.75;
increased second moment of area of the section may be 0.95A.cr
used to determine X...· (expressed in equivalent steel units). (2) when 5. 75 ~ Acr < 20: Ap ~ (Acr _ 1 );
(e) In unclad frames or in clad frames where the stiffness
(3) when Acr ~ 20: Ap ~ 1;
of the cladding is taken into account the following
relationship should be.satisfied: where Acr and Ap are as in (d).

General Sub-span

NOTE. Full length of beams and columns is to be used, except for roof beams where there are no upper columns.

(a) Beam design sub-frames

Column length considered

General External

NOTE. Full length of beams and columns is to be used except for the top storey where there are no upper columns.

(b) Column design sub-frames

Figure 11. Sub-frames

84

Section six. Connections
6.1 General recommendations
6.1.1 General
Connections should be designed on the basis of a realistic
assumption of the distribution of internal forces, having
regard to relative stiffnesses. Such assumption should
correspond with direct load paths through the elements of
connections. It is essential that equilibrium with the
external applied factored loads is maintained.
Where members are connected to the surface of a web or
flange or a section, the local ability of the web or flange to
transfer the applied forces should be checked and stiffening
provided where necessary.
Ease of fabrication and erection should be considered in the
design of joints and splices. Attention should be paid to
clearances necessary for tightening of fasteners, welding
procedures, subsequent inspection, surface treatment and
maintenance.
The ductility of steel assists the distribution of forces
generated within a joint. Therefore residual stresses and
stresses due to tightening of fasteners and normal accuracy
of fit-up need not usually be calculated.
When different forms of fasteners are used to carry a shear
load or when welding and fasteners are combined, then
one form of connection should normally be designed to
carry the total load except that torqued friction grip
fasteners may be designed to share the load with welding
provided the bolts are fully tightened after welding.
6.1.2 Intersections
Usually, members meeting at a joint should be arranged
with their centroidal axes meeting at a point. Where there is
eccentricity at intersections the members and connections
should be designed to accommodate the moments which
result. In the case of bolted framing of angles and tees the
setting out lines of the bolts may be adopted instead of the
centroidal axis.
6.1.3 Joints in simple construction
Joints between members in simple construction should be
capable of transmitting the forces calculated in design and
should be capable of accepting the resulting rotation
(see 2.1.2.2). They should not develop significant moments
adversely affecting members of the structure.
6.1.4 Joints in rigid construction
Joints between members in rigid construction should be
capable of transmitting the forces and moments calculated
from the design method. For elastic design the rigidity of
the joint should be not less than that of the members.
For plastic design the moment capacity of a joint at a
plastic hinge location should be not less than that of the
member and in addition the joint should possess sufficient
plastic rotation capacity.
The fabrication restrictions given in 5.3.7 should also be
applied where local yield lines are assumed in the design of
elements of rigid connections. This applies irrespective of
whether elastic or plastic design is used for the structure.
85
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section six
6.1.5 Joints in semi-rigid construction
Joints between members in semi-rigid construction should
provide a predictable degree of interaction between
members, as described in 2.1.2.4. They should be capable
of transmitting the restraint moments in addition to the
other forces and moments at the joints. It is important that
the connection is neither too rigid nor too flexible to fulfil
accurately the assumptions made in design.
6.1.6 Joints subject to vibration and/or load reversal
Where a connection is subject to impact or vibration,
pretensioned friction grip fasteners, locking devices or
welding should be used.
Where a connection is subject to reversal of stress (unless
such stress is due solely to wind) or where for some special
reason slipping of bolts is unacceptable, then pretensioned
friction grip fasteners or welding should be used.
Where repetition of loading makes fatigue a design criterion
(see 2.4.3). the fabrication restrictions given in 5.3.7
should be applied.
6.1.7 Splices
6.1.7.1 General. Splices should be designed to hold the
connected members in place and wherever practicable the
members should be arranged so that the centroidal axis of
the splice coincides with the centroidal axis of the members
joined. If eccentricity is present then the resulting forces
should be catered for.
6.1.7.2 Splices in compression members. Where the
members are not prepared for full contact in bearing the
splice should be designed to transmit all the moments and
forces to which the member at that point is subjected.
Where the members are prepared for full contact in bearing
the splice should provide continuity of stiffness about both
axes and resist any tension where bending is present.
The splice should be as near as possible to the ends of the
member or points of inflexion. Where this is not achieved
account should be taken of the moment induced by strut
action. See C.3.
6.1.7.3 Splices in tension members. The splice covers
should be designed to transmit all the moments and forces
to which the member at that point is subjected.
6.1.7.4 Splices in beams. Beam splices should be designed
to transmit all the forces and moments in the member at
that point and have adequate stiffness.
6.2 Fastener spacing and edge distances
6.2.1 Minimum spacing
The distance between centres of fasteners should be not less
than 2.5 times the nominal diameter of the fastener.
6.2.2 Maximum spacing in unstiffened plates
The distance between centres of two adjacent fasteners in a
line lying in the direction of stress should not exceed 14t
where t is the thickness of the thinner element. Where the
members are exposed to corrosive influences the maximum
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section six
spacing of fasteners in any direction should not exceed 16t
or 200 mm, where tis the thickness of the thinner outside
ply.
6.2.3 Minimum edge and end distances
The distance from the centre of a fastener hole to the edge
or end of any part should be not less than the value given in
table 31. The edge distance is the distance from the centre
of a hole to the adjacent edge at right angles to the direction
of stress. The end distance is the distance from the centre
of a hole to the adjacent edge in the direction in which the
fastener bears. The end distance should also be sufficient to
provide adequate bearing capacity (see 6.3.3.3 and 6.4.2.2).
For slotted holes, edge and end distances should be measured
from the centre of the end radius of the slot, at the end
nearest the edge or end of the material, see figure 11 a.
Table 31. Minimum edge and end distances to fasteners
Quality of cut Edge and
end distance
For a rolled, machine flame cut,
sawn or planned edge 1.250
For a sheared or hand flame cut
edge and any end 1.400
D is the diameter of the hole.
e are countersunk, the thickness of the ply minus half
e = end or edge distance
Figure 11a. Minimum edge and end distances
6.2.4 Maximum edge distances
The maximum distance to the nearest line of fasteners from
an edge of any unstiffened part should not exceed 11 te.
This rule does not apply to fasteners interconnecting the
components of back-to-back tension members (see 4.6.3).
Where the members are exposed to corrosive influences the
maximum edge distance should·not exceed 40 mm + 4t.
6.3 Ordinary bolting
6.3.1 Effective areas of bolts
Since threads can occur in the shear plane, the area A. for
resisting shear should normally be taken as the tensile stress
86
area, At, as specified in the appropriate British Standard.
For bolts where the tensile stress area is not defined At
should be taken as the area at the bottom of the threads.
Where it can be shown that the threads do not occur in the
shear plane A 5 may be taken as the shank area A.
In the calculation of thread length allowance should be
made for tolerance and thread run off.
6.3.2 Shear capacity
Provided that no reductions are required for long joints
(see 6.3.4) or large grips (see 6.3.5) the shear capacity, P5 ,
of a bolt should be taken as:
Ps.=PsAs
where
Ps is the shear strength obtained from table 32;
A, is the shear area as defined in 6.3.1, i.e. A or At.
6.3.3 Bearing capacity
6.3.3.1 General. The effective capacity of a bolt in bearing
on any ply should be taken as the lesser of the bearing
capacity of the bolt (see 6.3.3.2) and the bearing capacity
of the connected ply (see 6.3.3.3).
6.3.3.2 Capacity of bolt. The bearing capacity of the bolt
itself should be taken as:
pbb = dtpbb
where
d is the nominal diameter;
t is the thickness of the connected ply, or, if the bolts
the depth of countersinking;
Pbb is the bearing strength of the bolt obtained from
table 32.
6.3.3.3 Capacity of connected ply. The bearing capacity,
Pbs• of the connected ply should be taken as:
Pbs = dtPbs ,.;; 12 etpbs
1
where
Pbs is the bearing strength of the connected parts
obtained from table 33;
d is the nominal diameter of the bolt;
e is the end distance, as defined in 6.2.3;
t is the thickness of the ply, as defined in 6.3.3.2.
6.3.4 Long joints
When the joint length, Li• of a splice or end connection in a
compression or tension element containing more than two
bolts (i.e. the distance between the first and last rows of
bolts, measured in the direction of which the load is
transferred) exceeds 500 mm, the shear capacity, P,, should
be taken as:
5500- Li)
P. = PsAs ( 5000
but not more than given in 6.3.5 for large grips, if applicable
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section six

where
Ps is the shear strength of the bolt, table 32;
Table 32. Strength of bolts in clearance holes

A 5 is the shear area; Bolt grade Other grades

Li is the joint length (in mm). see figure 12. of fasteners
gr4.6 gr 8.8

6.3.5 Large grip lengths

N/mm 2 N/mm2 N/mm 2
When the grip length, T9 , (i.e. the total thickness of the
Shear strength, Ps 160 375 0.48U1
connected plies) exceeds five times the nominal diameter, d,
but< 0.69 Y 1
of the bolts, the shear capacity, P5 , should be taken as:
Bearing strength, Pbb 460 1035 0.72 (Uf + Yf)

Ps = PsAs cds:T) g
(but see table 33)
Tension strength, Pt 195 450 0.58U1
but not more than given in 6.3.4 for long joints, if applicable. but< 0.83 Y 1

6.3.6 Bolts subject to tension Yt is the specified minimum yield strength of the fastener.
6.3.6.1 Tension capacity. The tension capacity, Pt, of a bolt Ut is the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength of
the fastener.
(including countersunk bolts) should be obtained from:
Pt = PtAt
where
Pt is the tension strength obtained from table 32; Table 33. Bearing strength of connected parts for
ordinary bolts in clearance holes, Pbs
At is the tensile stress area as specified in the
appropriate British Standard. For bolts where the
Steel to BS 4360 Other grades
tensile stress area is not defined At should be taken of steel
as the area at the bottom of the threads. gr 43 gr 50 gr 55
6.3.6.2 Prying. In connections subject to tension prying
action need not be taken into account provided the N/mm 2 N/mm 2 N/mm 2 N/mm 2
strengths given in table 32 are used. 460 550 650 0.65(U 5 + Y5)

6.3.6.3 Combined shear and tension. When bolts are Y 5 is the specified minimum yield strength.
subject to both shear and tension then in addition to the U 5 is the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength.
conditions in 6.3.1 to 6.3.6.2 the following relationship
should be satisfied:
F5 Ft
-+-<1.4 6.4 Friction grip fasteners
Ps pt
where 6.4. 1 General
F. is the applied shear; For a parallel shank friction grip fastener the transverse
capacity should be obtained from the minimum value given
F 1 is the applied tension;
by the slip resistance (see 6.4.2.1), the bearing capacity
P5 is the shear capacity (see 6.3.2); (see 6.4.2.2) and, where appropriate, the resistance of long
P1 is the tension capacity (see 6.3.6.1). joints (see 6.4.2.3).

Figure 12. Joint length at splice

87
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section six
For a waisted shank fastener the capacity should be
obtained from the slip resistance (see 6.4.3) only and the
bearing and long joint capacities need not be checked.
NOTE. The slip resistance of a parallel shank friction grip fastener
is based on a serviceability criterion but for ease of calculation has
been presented in a form which may be checked against factored
load. The result of this is that the connection will slip into bearing
between th&working and the failure load, and for this reason the
bearing capacity should be checked against factored load. The shear
capacity at the failure load is automatically satisfied by limiting the
slip factor,!J., to 0.55 provided that the connection is not a long
joint. The capacity of long joints is a shear capacity check.
The slip resistance of a waisted shank friction grip fastener is a
failure criterion. The connection will not slip into bearing until the
factored load has been reached and it is, therefore, not necessary to
check the bearing and long joint capacities.
6.4.2 Parallel shank friction grip fasteners
6.4.2.1 Slip resistance. The slip resistance, PsL• provided
by a parallel shank friction grip fastener should be taken as:
PsL = 1.1KsJ.1.P0
where
P0 is the minimum shank tension as specified in
BS 4604;
K, = 1.0 for fasteners in clearance holes;
= 0.85 for fasteners in oversized and short slotted
holes, and for fasteners in long slotted holes loaded
perpendicular to the slot;
=0.6 for fasteners in long slotted holes loaded
parallel to the slot;
p. is the slip factor as defined below,.;;; 0.55.
The slip factor,p., should be determined from the results of
tests as specified in BS 4604, except that for general grade
fasteners (i.e. friction grip fasteners complying with
BS 4395 : Part 1 or having similar mechanical properties)
in connections where the surfaces in contact meet the
requirements for untreated surfaces specified in BS 4604 :
Part 1 the slip factor may be taken as 0.45.
6.4.2.2 Bearing resistance. The bearing capacity, Pbg•
for parallel shank friction grip fasteners should be taken as:
Pbg = dtpbg ,.;;; /J etpbg
1
where
d is the nominal diameter of the fastener;
e is the end distance (i.e. the edge distance in the
direction in which the fastener bears);
is the thickness of the connected ply;
Pbg is the bearing strength of the parts connected
obtained from table 34.
6.4.2.3 Long joints. Where the joint length, Li• of a splice
or end connection containing more than two fasteners
(i.e. the distance between the first and last rows of
fasteners measured in the direction which the load is
transferred) exceeds 500 mm, the slip resistance, PsL•
of parallel shank fasteners should be taken as:
_
PsL -0.6P 0
(5500- Li)
5000
where Li is the joint length (in mm). see figure 12.
But not greater than that given by 6.4.2.1 and 6.4.2.2.
88
Table 34. Bearing strength of parts connected by
parallel shank friction grip fasteners, Pbg
Steel to BS 4360 Other grades
of steel
gr43 gr50 gr 55
N/mm 2 N/mm 2 N/mm 2 N/mm 2
825 1065 1210 2.2U, but..;;; 3.0 Y.
Y5 is the specified minimum yield strength of the steel.
U5 is its specified minimum ultimate tensile strength.
6.4.3 Waisted shank fasteners: slip resistance
The slip resistance, PsL, provided by a waisted shank
friction grip fastener should be taken as:
P 5 L =0.9K5 p.P 0
where K •· p. and P0 are as defined in 6.4.2.1.
6.4.4 Friction grip fasteners subject to external tension
6.4.4.1 Permitted types. Friction grip fasteners required
to carry externally applied tension should comply with
BS 4395 : Parts 1 or 3. Fasteners complying with BS 4395 :
Part 2 should not be subjected to externally applied tension.
6.4.4.2 Tension capacity. The tension capacity, Pt, of a
friction grip fastener complying with 6.4.4.1 should be
taken as 0.9P 0 , where P0 is the minimum shank tension as
specified in BS 4604.
6.4.5 Combined shear and tension
When friction grip fasteners are subject to both shear and
tension then in addition to the conditions given in 6.4.1
and 6.4.4 the following relationship should be satisfied:
F5 Ft
+ 0.8-..;;; 1
PsL pt
where
F 5 is the applied shear;
Ft is the external applied tension.
6.4.6 Holes for friction grip fasteners
6.4.6.1 General. Clearance holes should be specified for all
friction grip connections unless oversize or slotted holes are
required, when consideration should be given to minimum
spacing, edge and end distance, bearing strength and tension
capacity in order to provide the necessary strength in the
connected parts.
6.4.6.2 Size of holes
6.4.6.2.1 General. The size of holes for friction grip
fasteners should not exceed the dimensions given in table 35.
6.4.6.2.2 Oversize and short slotted holes. Oversize and
short slotted holes may be used in all plies of a friction grip
connection provided that a standard hardened washer is
positioned over the holes in the outer plies.
6.4.6.2.3 Long slotted holes. Long slotted holes should not
be used in more than one of the connected plies at any
individual faying surface.
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section six

Table 35. Maximum dimensions of holes

Bolt shank Clearance Oversize Short slotted Long slotted

diameter hole diameter hole diameter hole dimensions hole dimensions

mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
,;;;;; 22 d+2 d+5 d+2 d+6 d+2 2.5d
24 d+2 d+6 d+2 d+B d+2 2.5d
~ 27 d+3 d+B d+3 d + 10 d+3 2.5d

dis nominal bolt diameter (in mm).

Where long slotted holes are used in an outer ply an external
plate having sufficient size to completely cover the slot
should be provided. Such a washer or plate should be at
least 8 mm thick and of structural material but need not be
hardened. Hardened washers should also be placed under
the turned element.
6.5 Pin connections
6.5.1 General
Pin connected tension members and their connecting parts
should comply with 6.5.2. Pin connected compression
members need not.
Where the connected elements are clamped together by
external nuts the limits on thickness do not apply to
internal plies.
6.5.2 Tension members and pin plates
The thickness of an unstiffened element containing a pinhole
should be greater than or equal to 0.25 times the distance
from the edge of the hole to the edge of the element,
measured at right angles to the axis of the member.
See figure 13.
The net area beyond a pinhole parallel to, or within 45 o of
the axis of t~ member should be greater than or equal to
the net area A required for the member. The sum of the
areas at the pinhole perpendicular to the axis of the
member should be at least 1.33A. See figure 13.
Pin plates provided to increase the net area of a member or
to increase the bearing capacity of a pin should be arranged
to avoid eccentricity and should be of sufficient size to
distribute the load from the pin into the member.
6.5.3 Design of pins
6.5.3.1 General. The capacity of a pin connection should
be determined from the shear capacity of the pin at the
shear planes, see 6.5.3.2, and the bearing capacity on each
connected ply, see 6.5.3.3, with due regard to the distribu-
tion of load between the plies. The bending moment on the
pin should also be checked (see 6.5.3.4).
6.5.3.2 Shear capacity. The shear capacity of a pin should
be taken as:
0.6PypA
where
Pyp is the design strength of the pin;
A is the cross-sectional area of the pin.
6.5.3.3 Bearing capacity. The bearing capacity of a pin
should be taken as:
1.2pydt
where
d is the diameter of the pin;
t is the thickness of the connected part;
Pv is the lower of the design strengths of the pin and
the connected part.
6.5.3.4 Bending. The bending moments on a pin should be
calculated on the assumption that the forces transmitted
between the pin and the connected parts are uniformly
distributed along the length in contact in each case.
The moment capacity of the pin should be taken as:
1.2PypZ
where
Z is the elastic modulus of the pin;
Pvp is the design strength of the pin.
6.6 Weld detail and design
6.6.1 General
The details of all welded connections should comply with
BS 5135.
6.6.2 Details of fillet welds
6.6.2.1 End returns. Fillet welds terminating at the ends or
sides of parts should be returned continuously around the
corners for a distance of not less than twice the leg length,
s, of the weld unless access or the configuration renders
this impracticable. This detail is particularly important for
fillet welds on the tension side of parts carrying a bending
load.
6.6.2.2 Lap joints. In lap joints the minimum lap should be
not less than 4t where tis the thickness of the thinner part
joined. Single fillet welds should only be used where the
parts are restrained to prevent opening of the joint.

89
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section six

6.6.3 Partial penetration butt welds

Partial penetration butt welds should not be used inter-
mittently or in fatigue situations.

6.6.4 Welded details for structural hollow sections

A weld connecting two structural hollow sections end·to-end
should be a full penetration butt weld.
A weld connecting the end of a structural hollow section
A= 03 Xt to the surface of another member should be continuous
(1) r;;;>o.25D4 and may be either a butt weld throughout, a fillet weld
(2) D 2 X r;;;>.A throughout or a fillet weld in one part with a butt weld in
(3) 2 X D 4 X r;;;>1.3JA another with a continuous change from one to the other.

Figure 13. Pin-ended tension members 6.6.5 Design of fillet welds

6.6.2.3 End connections. Where the end of an element is
connected only by longitudinal fillet welds the length of
each weld, L, should be not less than the transverse spacing,
rw (see figure 14).
6.6.5.1 Design strength. The design strength, Pw• of a fillet
weld made using covered electrodes complying with
BS 639 on steel complying with BS 4360 should be
obtained from table 36 for the lowest grade of material
joined.

Table 36. Design strength, Pw

,.-------'y--
Grade of steel Electrode strength to BS 639 Other types

! ~L" - -"- . .:. . . - j. .:;,_j,s~-+-~

1 2s Min1mum 1 in BS 4360

~
E43 E51 E51*

r"
.".'.
-j -----, N/mm 2 Nlmm 2 Nlmm 2 Nlmm 2
40 or 43 215 215 -
WR50 and 50 215 255 - 0.5Ue but
~ 0.54U5
55 - 255 275*

*Only applies to electrodes having a minimum tensile strength

of 550 N/mm 2 and a minimum yield strength of 450 Nlmm 2 •
',, Weld stopped short
Ue is the minimum tensile strength of the electrode based on
all weld tensile tests as specified in BS 709.
U 5 is the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength of the
steel.

Figure 14. Welded end connections
6.6.2.4 Single fillet welds. A single fillet weld should not
be subject to a bending moment about the longitudinal axis
of the weld.
6.6.2.5 Intermittent fillet welds. Intermittent fillet welds
should not be used in fatigue situations or where capillary
action could lead to the formation of rust pockets.
The longitudinal spacing along any one edge of the element
between effective lengths of weld, as given in 6.6.5.2,
should not exceed the lesser of 300 mm or 16t for
compression elements or 24t for tension elements, where t
is the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Back-to-back struts and ties should have spacing of welds in
accordance with 4.7.13 and 4.6.3 respectively.
End runs of fillet welds should extend to the end of the
part connected.
Where the fillet welds are symmetrically disposed as shown
in figure 15 the strength of the weld may be taken as equal
to the design strength of the parent metal provided that:
(a) the weld is made with a suitable electrode (or other
welding consumable) which will produce all weld tensile
specimens as specified in BS 709 having both a minimum
yield strength and a minimum tensile strength not less
than those specified for the parent metal;
I "'1111 ,..
I
Lf---
f
Tension in connected
plate
Figure 15. Symmetrical fillet welds

90

(b) the sum of the throat sizes is not less than the
connected plate thickness;
(c) the weld is principally subject to direct compression
or tension.
6.6.5.2 Effective length. The effective length of a run of
fillet weld should be taken as the overall length less one leg
length, s, for each end which does not continue round a
corner.
The effective length should be not less than 4s.
6.6.5.3 Throat size. The effective throat size, a, of a fillet
weld should be taken as the perpendicular distance from
the root of the weld to a straight line joining the fusion
faces which lies within the cross section of the weld.
It should not, however, be taken as greater than 0. 7 times
the effective leg length, s.
6.6.5.4 Angle of intersection of members connected by
fillet welds. Where the fusion faces form an angle of
greater than 120 ° or less than 60 ° the adequacy of the
joint should be demonstrated by test.
6.6.'5.5 Design rules for fillet welds. The vector sum of the
design stresses due to all forces and moments transmitted
by the weld should not exceed the design strength, Pw·
The design stress in a fillet weld should be calculated on a
thickness equal to the effective throat size, a.
For a fillet weld with unequal size legs, a deep penetration
fillet weld or a partial penetration butt weld with a
superimposed fillet weld, the shear and tension stress on the
fusion line should not exceed 0. 7Pv and 1.0py respectively.
6.6.6 Design of butt welds
6.6.6.1 Design strength of butt welds. The design strength
of a full or partial penetration butt weld should be taken as
equal to that of the parent metal, provided that the weld is
made with a suitable electrode (or other welding consumable)
which will produce all weld tensile specimens as specified
in BS 709 having both a minimum yield strength and a
minimum tensile strength not less than those specified for
the parent metal.
91
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section six
6.6.6.2 Throat thickness of partial penetration butt welds.
The throat thickness of a partial penetration butt weld
welded from one side or the thickness of each throat
welded from both sides should be taken as the minimum
depth of penetration.
In the case of a V or bevel weld the depth of penetration
should be taken as the depth of preparation minus 3 mm.
Except where it can be shown that greater penetration can
consistently be achieved the depth of penetration on one
side for a J or U weld should be taken as the depth of weld
preparation.
The specified penetration should be not less than 2.../t
where t is the thickness of the thinner part joined (in mm).
6.6.6.3 Design rules for partial penetration butt welds.
When the weld is unsymmetrical relative to the parts joined
the resulting eccentricity should be allowed for when
calculating the maximum stress and the joint restrained
against rotation.
The capacity of a weld comprising of a partial penetration
butt weld and a superimposed fillet weld should be
calculated as for a fillet weld, as given in 6.6.5.
6. 7 Holding-down bolts
Holding-down bolts should be designed to resist the effect
of factored loads determined in accordance with 2.4.
They should provide resistance to tension due to uplift
forces and bending moments and shear where appropriate.
Holding-down bolts required to transmit tension should be
anchored into the foundation by a washer plate or other
load distributing member embedded in the concrete;
this plate or member should be designed to span any grout
tubes or adjustment tubes provided for the holding-down
bolts.
The embedment length of the holding down bolts and the
arrangement of the load distributing assembly should be
such that in transmitting the loads from the anchorage to
the foundation the load capacity of the foundation is not
exceeded.
The tension capacity of the bolt should be determined in
accordance with 6.3.6.
Rag bolts and indented foundation bolts should not be
used to resist uplift forces.
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section seven
Section seven. Loading tests
7.1 General
Testing may be undertaken when:
(a) the design or construction is not entirely in accord-
ance with sections one to six of this standard and use is
made of experimental verification as recommended
in 2.1.2.5 (see tests (1) and (2) below);
(b) design load limits are to be established from a
knowledge of the ultimate capacity of a component or
structure (see test (3) below);
(c) confirmation is required of the consistency of
production of components or structures originally
justified by test (see test (4) below);
(d) the actual performance of an existing structure is to
be established if its capacity is in question (see test (1)
below).
To meet these situations a basis is presented for four types
of tests:
(1) an acceptance test for confirmation of general
structural behaviour;
(2) a strength test against the required factored loads;
(3) a test to determine the ultimate capacity and mode
of failure;
(4) a check test to establish consistency of production.
Because circumstances and test facilities vary greatly,
the test procedure should be agreed in advance by all
concerned.
These test procedures are intended for steel structures only.
For structures of composite construction in steel and
concrete reference should be made to BS 5950 : Section 3.1
and Part 4.
Structures qualifying for acceptance from loading tests
should be of robust and practical construction and
reasonably insensitive to incidental loads.
Testing of scale models or of items subject to fluctuating
loads which could cause fatigue to become the design
criterion is not covered by this section.
7.2 Test conditions
The design of the test rig should be such that the loading
system adequately simulates the magnitude and distribution
of the loading and allows the specimen to perform in a
manner representative of service conditions. The specimen
should be free to deflect under load and lateral and torsional
restraints should be representative of those in service.
Care should be taken to avoid inadvertent eccentricities at
the points of application of the test loads and at the
supports.
Due attention should be paid to the safety of the test
arrangements particularly in ultimate tests. Failure of a test
specimen should not lead to general instability of the test
rig.
Careful consideration should be given to the positions at
which deflections are to be measured. The anticipated
92
magnitude of such deflections should be estimated in
advance with generous allowances made for movement
beyond the elastic range. It is important to ensure that the
loading system can follow the movements of the specimen
without interruption or abnormal restraint. Load and
deflection measurements should be controlled as closely as
practicable.
In some situations it may be desirable to determine the
magnitude of stresses in a specimen. This may be demon-
strated qualitatively by means of brittle coatings or
quantitatively by measurements of strain. Such information
should be considered supplementary to the overall behaviour
as determined by deflections.
Where test results are used to establish or confirm the
behaviour of similar structures or components the properties
of the steel used in the relevant items should be established
by coupon tests to validate comparisons between tests
carried out on different specimens or at different times.
Coupons should either be cut from the same sections or
plates or else recovered from unyielded areas of the specimen
after test.
Loading should be applied in a number of regular increments
at regular intervals in each phase. At each increment the
specimen should be carefully examined for signs of rupture,
yield or buckling. A running plot should be maintained of
loading against principal deflection. When this indicates
significant non-linearity, load increments should be reduced.
On the attainment of maximum load for either acceptance
or strength tests, the load should be maintained for at least
1 hour with recordings of load and deflection being taken
at the beginning and end of this period to establish whether
the specimen is subject to creep.
Unloading should be completed in regular decrements with
deflection readings taken at each stage.
7.3 Test procedures
7.3.1 Test loads
The test load for an acceptance test should be actual dead
load present during test x 1.0 + remainder of the dead
load .x 1.15 + imposed load x 1.25 but need not be taken as
more than the average of the factored and unfactored load.
The test load for a strength test should be based on the
factored load calculated in accordance with section two of
this standard with appropriate factors applied to dead,
imposed and wind loads separately or in combination as
appropriate.
It is important to recognize that the self weight of the
specimen may not be representative of the actual dead load
in service. Allowance for any difference should be made in
the calculation of the test loads to be applied.
7.3.2 Preliminary loading
Prior to any test it may be advantageous to apply (and then
remove) preliminary bedding down loading not exceeding
the unfactored loads.

7.3.3 Acceptance test
This test is intended as a non-destructive test for confirming
structu rat performance.
The assembly should prove capable of sustaining the test
loading as given in 7 .3.1. It should be recognized that such
loading applied to certain structures may cause permanent
local distortions. Such effects may not indicate structural
failure in an acceptance test but the possibility of their
occurrence should be agreed before testing.
The assembly should demonstrate substantially linear
behaviour under test loading and on removal of the test
load the residual deflection should not exceed 20 % of the
maximum recorded. If these conditions are not met the test
should be repeated and the assembly should demonstrate
substantially linear behaviour under test loading and the
residual deflection should not exceed 10% of the maximum
recorded.
Where this test is being used to relate to performance
established in earlier tests, the deflections should be
measured at the same positions. The original maximum
deflections should not be exceeded by more than 20 %.
7.3.4 Strength test
The strength test is used to confirm the calculated capacity
of a structure or component. Where a number of items are
to be constructed to a common design, and one or more
prototypes are tested to confirm their strength, the others
may be accepted without further tests provided they are
similar in all relevant respects to the prototype (see 7.3.6).
Before carrying out the strength test the specimen should
first be submitted to and satisfy the acceptance test
described in 7.3.3.
The capacity of the assembly under test will be dependent
on the material properties. The actual yield strength of the
steel or steels in the assembly should be determined from
coupon tests. An averaged value should be taken from such
tests having regard to the importance of each element in the
assembly. The test load (including self weight) is given by:
averaged yield strength)
Test load =( x factored load
design strength
At this load there should be no failure by buckling or
rupture of any part of the specimen.
On removal of the test load the deflection should be
reduced by at least 20 %.
7 .3.5 Test to failure
It is only from a test to failure that the real mode of failure
and true capacity of a specimen can be determined. Where
the item is not required for use it may be advantageous to
secure this additional information after a strength test.
Alternatively the objective may be to determine the true
design capacity from the ultimate test capacity. In this
situation it is still desirable to carry out the load cycling of
the acceptance and strength tests. An estimate should be
made of the anticipated design capacity as a basis for such
tests.
Before a test to failure the specimen should first satisfy the
strength test described in 7.3.4. Where the design capacity
93
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Section seven
has been estimated it may be desirable to adjust its value in
the light of the specimen's behaviour.
During a test to failure the loading should first be applied in
increments up to the strength test load. Consideration of the
principal deflection plot should then determine subsequent
load increments.
The ultimate test load is defined as that point at which the
specimen is unable to sustain any further increases in load.
At this point gross permanent distortion is likely to have
occurred and in some cases gross deformation may define
the test limit.
Provided that there is a ductile failure the design capacity
of a similar assembly may be determined from:
design strength )
(
Design capacity = Kt averaged yield strength x
x ultimate test load
In the case of a sudden ('brittle') failure the averaged yield
strength should be replaced by the averaged ultimate tensile
strength of the steel, or by 1.2 times the averaged yield
strength in the case of a sudden buckling-type failure.
In cases where the failure has occurred due to strut or
lateral torsional buckling the ratio may be calculated using
the two values for the design strength on the appropriate
curve for the 'design strength' and 'averaged yield strength'.
These values are to be taken at the slenderness ratio
appropriate to the situation.
For a single test Kt should be taken as 0.9 unless the
resulting capacity falls below the design capacity confirmed
by the strength test, when the latter should be taken.
For two or more related tests Kt may be taken as 1.0
provided that the lowest of the individual ultimate test
loads is used.
7.3.6 Check tests
Where the assembly is designed on the basis of tests as
defined in 7.1 (a) or (b) and a production run is carried out
of that assembly the following precautions should be
observed.
(a) An appropriate number of samples (not less than two)
should be selected from each production batch at
random.
(b) The samples should be carefully examined to ensure
they are similar in all respects to the prototype tested,
particular attention being given to the following items:
( 1) dimensions of components and connections;
(2) tolerance and workmanship;
(3) quality of steel used, checked with reference to
mill certificates.
(c) Where it is not possible to determine either the
variations or the effect of variations from the prototype
an acceptance test should be carried out. The maximum
recorded deflection should not exceed 120% of the
deflection recorded during the acceptance test on the
prototype and the residual deflection should not be
more than 105 %of that recorded for the prototype.
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Appendix A

Appendices

Appendix A. Formal statement of safety coefficient 'Y e which can be considered to be a function of
two partial coefficients, 'Yet and 'Y e 2 , defined as follows.
factor format adopted in BS 5950:
'Yet is to take account of the nature of the structure and
Part 1 to facilitate correlation with its behaviour, for example structures or parts of
ISO 2394and BS 5400: Part3 structures in which collapse or partial collapse can
occur without warning, where redistribution of
internal forces is not possible, or where failure of a
A.1 Design loads element can lead to overall collapse.
The design loads, 0*, are determined from the nominal 'Y e 2 is to take account of the seriousness of attaining a
loads, Qk< by the relationship: limit state from other points of view, for example
Q* = 'Y2t 'Y22 Qk economic circumstances, danger to community.
where In general, for the purposes of the design of structures in
'Yllt takes account of the possible deviation of loads from accordance with the recommendations of this standard,
their specified value; the effects of 'Yet and 'Yez can be considered to be already
incorporated in the values of 'Yt or 'Ym adopted.
-y22 takes account of the reduced probability that
various loadings acting together will simultaneously
reach their characteristic value. A.5 Verification of structural adequacy
A.5.1 For a satisfactory design:
A.2 Design load effects R* ~s*

The design load effects, s*, are determined from the design i.e. - 1- function ( fk ) ~Effects of 'Yps 'Y2 1 'Y2 2 Qk
loads, 0*, by the relationship: 'Ypm 'Ymt 'Ym2
S* = Effects of 'Yps Q* A.5.2 In BS 5950 : Part 1, the relationship in A.5.1 is
where expressed as:
'Yps takes account of the possible deviation of the
behaviour of the structure from that of the design
function ( ~:) ~ Effects of 'Yt Qk (dead loads) +
model. + 'Yt Qk (imposed loads)
where
A.3 Design resistance 'Ym = 'Ymt 'Ym 2 and is taken account of in table 6 for
design strength;
The design resistance, R*, is determined from the relation- 'Yt = 'Ypm 'Yps'YQt 'Yn and is as given in table 2.
ship:
A.l).3 In BS 5400 : Part 3 the relationship in A.5.1 is
R* = -1- function ( fk . ) expressed as:
'Ypm 'Ymt 'Ym2
where function (fk) ~The effects of 'YtL Qk
'Yf3 'Ymt 'Ym2
fk is the characteristic strength of the material;
where
'Ypm takes account of the possible deviation of the
behaviour of the material in the structure from that 'Yt3 = 'Y pm 'Yps
assumed in design; 'Ymt and 'Ym 2 are taken as a single factor 'Ym
'Ymt takes account of the possible reduction in strength 'YtL = 'Yft 'Yt2
of the material from the characteristic value;
'Ym 2 takes account of manufacturing tolerances.
A.6 Comparison of partial safety factors
A.4 Modification coefficient. yc A comparison of methods of application of partial safety
factors in ISO 2394, BS 5400 : Part 3 and BS 5950 is given
Where necessary, e.g. for the design of key elements,
in table 37.
the value of the partial cooefficients may be modified by a

94
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Appendix A

Table 37. Comparison of partial safety factors

Partial safety factors 'Yt 'Y2 'Ypm 'Yps 'Ymt 'Ym2 'Yet 'YC2

ISO 2394 'Y Sl 'YS2 'YS3 'Ymt 'Ym2 'Yet 'Yc:z

'Ye

BS 5400 : Part 3 'Ytl 'Y12 'Yt3 'YmJ 'Ym2 'YcJ 'Yc2

'YfL = 'Yf] 'Y12 'Ym 'Yc

BS 5950 : Part 1 'Y~t 'Y.I!2 'Ypm 'Yps 'Yml 'Ym:~ 'Y cl 'Yc2

'Y2 = 'Y2 I 'Y22 'Yp = 'Ypm 'Yps 'Ym 'Yc

'Yt ='Yli'Yp included in

design strength

NOTE. 'Yc is implicitly covered in modification of other factors where nec~ssary.

Appendix B. Lateral torsional buckling of equivalent uniform moment factor, m, (~ 1) should be

members subject to bending used. This factor is used to modify the factored applied
moment to produce an equivalent uniform moment
B.1 Introduction which is then considered as the design moment.
(b) For other cases, the value of the equivalent slender-
When an unrestrained beam deflects due to bending in
plane, it also deforms out of plane and twists about its ness should be adjusted by use of the slenderness
correction factor, n, resulting in a modified value of the
longitudinal axis due to imperfections and initial out-of-
buckling resistance moment.
straightness. This effect is then amplified by the application
of further moment and eventually the beam may buckle at Whichever method is used the factor for the other method
an applied moment less than the full moment capacity of should be taken as 1.0.
the section. This effect is known as 'lateral torsional
buckling'.
The theoretical case for lateral torsional buckling is taken as B.2 Buckling resistance moment
the elastic critical moment of a simply supported member
8.2. 1 General
of uniform section with a uniform moment applied about
its major axis, the member being restrained at its supports The buckling resistance moment, Mb, may be obtained
against torsion (i.e. rotation about its longitudinal axis) and from:
lateral deflection but otherwise unrestrained. MeMp
Mb=
For real members with other conditions of support, loading ¢s + (¢s 2 - MeMp) 112
or restraint, the actual elastic critical moment varies and Mp + (71LT + 1)Me
modification to the theoretical case may be made in two ¢s = 2
ways.
where
(a) When the member carries no transverse loading in the
length between restraints (i.e. bending is induced by Me is the elastic critical moment (see 8.2.2);
moments applied at its end or the restraints) the M P is the plastic moment capacity = PvS><;

95
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Appendix B

Sx is the plastic modulus about the major axis; (b) u, the buckling parameter, and x, the torsional index,
Pv is the design strength; are given by:
TILT is the Perry coefficient (see 8.2.3). for flanged sections symmetrical about the minor
axis:
The above formula for Mb is the smaller root of:
(Me - Mb)(MP- Mb) =TIL TMeMb u= (4S/ 'Y)l/4
A2h 2
5 1
8.2.2 Elastic critical moment x = 0.566h 5 (A/J) /2
The elastic critical moment should be taken as: for flanged sections symmetrical about the major
M 1r2 E axis:
ME = :--"-p, - -
ALT2Py u ('vS/ 'Y)l/4
=
where AL T is the equivalent slenderness (see 8.2.5). A2 H

8.2.3 Perry coefficient X= ( AH)

1.132 - -
lyJ
/2 1

The Perry coefficient, TILT, for lateral-torsional buckling

should be taken as follows: In the above:
(a) for rolled sections: Sx is the plastic modulus about the major axis;
TILT = o:b(AL T- ALo l.
but
'Y is a factor = (1- ~: ) ;

TILT~ 0 lx is the second moment of area about the major

(b) for welded sections: axis;
lv is the second moment of area about the minor
TILT = 2o:bALo
axis;
but
A is the cross-sectional area of the member;
TILT .;;;; 2o:b (AL T - ALa)
H is the warping constant which may be obtained
TILT ~o:b(ALT- ALol from published tables or the approximate formula
TILT~ 0 for flanged sections given in 8.2.5(c);
where J is the torsion constant which may be obtained
ALT is the equivalent slenderness (see 8.2.5); from published tables or the approximate formula
for flanged sections given in 8.2.5(c);
ALo is the limiting equivalent slenderness (see 8.2.4);
h 5 is the distance between the shear centres of the
o:b is a constant, taken as 0.007.
flanges.
8.2.4 Limiting equivalent slenderness (c) J, the torsion constant, and H, the warping constant,
for flanged sections (see figure 16) may be obtained
The limiting equivalent slenderness should be taken as:
from the following approximate formulae:
ALo = 0.4
( 7T2£)1/2
Pv 1 3 3 3
J=- (t, b, +t2 b2 +tw hw)
3
8.2.5 Determination of equivalent slenderness
The equivalent slenderness should be taken as:
where
ALT =nuvA
b 1 and b 2 are the flange widths;
where
t 1 and t 2 are the flange thicknesses;
A=LFi.lrv
tw is the web thickness;
n, u, v are defined as follows.
h 5 is the distance between the shear centres of
(a) n is determined from consideration of the loading
the flanges;
an~ restraint conditions of the member. For members of
uniform cross section throughout their length, n may be hw is the web depth.
obtained from table 13. For jllembers of varying cross For plates of normal proportions J = 0.32bt 3 and thus
section throughout their length, n should be obtained for flanged sections symmetrical about the minor axis:
from 8.3.
x-h ( I:.bt + hwt w )%
5 I:.bt 3 +hwtw 3

96
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Appendix B

8.2.6 Box sections (including RHS)

t1 b1 8.2.6.1 For a box section subject to a moment:
Lr
,---I
I
---+·
XLT = n 2.25 (¢b X) 112
where

1/>t, is the buckling index= ( SA/J'Y ') 1h

hw
- __ ,'vi

hs
A is the area;
J is the torsion constant which may be obtained from
the approximate value given in 8.2.6.2;

'Y' is the factor (1 - .!:t_)

Ix
(1 - _:!_ )
2.6Ix
NOTE. Box sections of uniform wall thickness need not be checked
for lateral torsional buckling effects provided that?..= (Lefry) is not
- greater than the limiting values of ?.. given in table 38.

I I ..
t2
b2__j
Table 38. Limiting A. for
box sections of uniform wall
Figure 16. Dimensions for symmetrical plate girders thickness, including RHS
D/8 X

1 00

where
b is the breadth of each plate element; 350 X 275
2
t is the thickness of each plate element. Pv

(d) v, the slenderness factor, is qiven by: 225 X 275

3
v= [(4N(1-N)+ 2~ (~Y +vPr/2 +VI J Pv

170 X 275
where 4
Pv
let
N is the ratio
Uet+lttl D, 8 are overall depth, breadth
of box respectively.
let is the second moment of area of the compression
flange about the minor axis of the section;
Itt is the second moment of area of the tension flange 8.2.6.2 For a box section the value of the torsion constant,
about the minor axis of the section; J, may be obtained from the following approximate
formula:
VI is the monosymmetry index, determined as
follows: J = 4Ah 2 /'L(s/t)
For I or T-section with lipped flanges, VI can be where
calculated from: s is the breadth of each enclosing element;
VI= 0.8(2N- 1) (1 + ~~) for N> 0.5 t is the thickness of each element.
For an RHS a more accurate value is given by:

V1=1.0(2N-1) (1+ ~~)forN<0.5 J

t3 h 4Ah 2 t
=-+ ---
3 h
where where
DL is the depth of the lip; h is the mean perimeter;
D is the overall depth of the section. Ah is the area enclosed by the mean perimeter;
NOTE. When the flange of the section is not lipped, DL = 0,
t is the thickness of the section.
and hence
1/1.= 0.8(2N-1) for N > 0.5
1/1 = 1.0(2N-1) for N < 0.5

97
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Appendix C and D

8.2. 7 Plates and flats C.2 Perry factor

For an individual plate, flat, or other solid rectangular
The Perry factor, 11. tor flexural buckling under load should
section subject to a moment about its major axis:
be obtained from:
Led) 1/2
A.LT =n 2.8 ( T 11 = 0.001 a(A.- A0 ) but not less than zero
where
where
a is the Robertson constant, which has the following
Le is the effective length; values:
d is the depth; 2.0 for table 27(a)
t is the thickness; 3.5 for table 27(b)
n is as given in 4.3.7.6. 5.5 for table 27(c)
8.0 for table 27(d)
A. is the slenderness (see 4.7.3);
B.3 Beams of varying section throughout A. 0 is the limiting slenderness, which should be taken as:
their length , 1r2 E
0.2 ( -
)lh
When the section of a beam varies along its length between Py
restraint points, the bending strength, pb, is determined
using the properties of the section at the point of maximum
moment. This value of Pb applies throughout the length
between adjacent restraints. C.3 Strut action
Provided that R 1 is not less than 0.2, the value of n to be The moment due to strut action has a maximum value
used in the expression for A.L T should be determined from: Mmax midway between points of inflexion of the buckled
n=(1.5- 0.5R 1 )but~1.0;
shape (the points between which the effective length is
measured) given by:
where
11 fcS
R 1 is the ratio of the flange area at the point of Mmax =
minimum moment to that at the point of maximum ( 1 - fciPe)
moment between adjacent restraint points; where
R 1 refers either to the ratio of total area of both fc is the compressive stress due to axial load;
flanges or to the area of the compression flange only, S is the plastic modulus.
whichever gives the smaller value of R 1. The moment at any other point can be obtained by
For non-uniform sections, m = 1.0 (see 4.3). assuming a sinusoidal variation, i.e. the moment due to
strut action at a point, distance Lx from a point of
inflexion, is given by:
180Lx)
Mmaxsin ( ~

Appendix C. Compression strength:

Perry strut formula
C.1 Basis
The compressive strength, Pc, may be obtained from:
Appendix D. Effective lengths of struts
in simple construction
PePv
Pc = 1/> + (1/>2 _ PePy)l/2 0.1 Stanchions for single storey
where 1/J =
Pv + 111 + 1)pe buildings (see 4. 7.2(c))
2
0.1.1 Typical cases
where Figures 17 to 21 illustrate how the effective lengths of
Pe is the Euler strength (1r2 E /A. 2 ); typical stanchions in single storey buildings may be
Pv is the design strength; determined provided the following conditions apply.
11 is the Perry factor. (a) In the plane of the diagram the stanchions act as
cantilevers tied together by the roof trusses, but in this
The above formula for Pc is the smaller root of:
plane the tops of the stanchions are not otherwise held
(pE -pc)(pv -pc) = TlPePc in position or restrained in direction.

98
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Appendix D

(b) Perpendicular to the plane of the diagram, the tops

of the stanchions are effectively held in position by
members connecting them to a braced bay, or by other
suitable means. In the case of figures 19 to 21 the braced
bay also holds the columns in position at crane girder
level.
(c) The bases of the stanchions are effectively held in See 0.1.1. (b)
position and restrained in direction in both planes.
(d) The foundations are capable of providing restraint
commensurate with that provided by the base.

0.1.2 Variations
Where the conditions differ from those given in 0.1.1 the
following variations to the effective lengths shown in
figures 17 to 21 may arise.
(a) If, in the plane of the diagram, the tops of the
stanchions are effectively held in position by horizontal
bracing or other suitable means, the effective lengths in
this plane may be obtained from table 24.
(b) If, in the plane of the diagram, the roof truss or L
other roof member is connected to the stanchions by a
connection capable of transmitting appreciable moment,
the effective length of the stanchion in this plane may be
determined in accordance with appendix E.
(c) If, perpendicular to the plane of the diagram,
one flange only of the stanchion is restrained at intervals
by sheeting rails, then for buckling out of the plane of X
the diagram the method given in appendix G may be I
used.
(d) If, perpendicular to the plane of the diagram,
the base of the column is not effectively restrained in
direction the effective lengths 0.85L or 0.85L 1 in
figures 17 to 21 should be increased to 1.0L or 1.0L 1
respectively.
y ___ + ___ I
I

I
y

I
I
X

Effective length of stanchion

Axis X-X= 1.5L
Axis Y-Y = 0.85L

Figure 17. Side stanchion

99
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Appendix D

- -r

I I

X L3
I
I

I
I
I
I

~~
~ l
I I
y
-
~~I
--- y r 1?'11

r"l
I I
I I
I
I
I
I

X L2 L L
X
I
I I
I

I
I
I

II
+ ___
I L,
I
___ y li=i 1-l-
Y- -
I
I
I I I Y_ _ Y
I
I
I
I

I L,
I

X I

l I

~
I

Alter native methods I

of res traint I
I

il

Effective length of stanch ion Effective length of stanchion

Axis X-X = 1.5L
Axis X-X= 1.5L
Axis Y-Y = 0.85L 1 , 1.0L 2 or 1.0L 3
Axis Y-Y = 0.85L 1
whichever is the greatest

Figure 18. Side stanchion with restraints Figure 19. Simple side stanchion with crane gantry

100
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Appendix D

Upper roof
stanchion

I
I
I
y. .I, Y2
2------H-1- - - - -
1

(r ane stanchion

I Effective length of stanchions

X
Upper roof stanchion
Axis X-X: 1.5L 1
Axis Y-Y: Y,-Y, : L 1
Lower roof stanchion
A Axis B-B : 0.85L
Y, y Axis Y-Y: L,, L 3 ,L 4 or L,
I I La whichever is
the greatest
Crane stanchion
I I
I I
L L3 Axis B-B : 0.85L
AxisY 1 -Y 1 :L 6 ,L,,L 6 orL 9

B-~fft
whichever is
L1 the greatest
Combined roof and crane stanchions
Axis A-A : 1.5L

IY, i Iy C.G.
L4 Axis B-B : 0.85L

A
Ls

' - - - Lower roof stanchion

Figure 20. Compound side stanchion with crane gantry

101
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Appendix D

Roof stanchion

Lt

A
I
'

I
I
Bt--~ _ _ _ B,
II I
I

I
Crane stanchion
A
Effective length of stanchions
Roof stanchion
Axis 8 1 -8 1 = L 1
A Axis A-A= 1.5L 1
L
y
I y
Crane stanchion
Axis B-B = 0.85 L
AxisY-Y=L 2 ,L 3 ,L 4 orL,
I whichever is
the greatest
Combined crane stanchion
Axis A-A = 1.5L
B Axis B-B = 0.85L

Figure 21. Compound valley stanchion with crane gantry

102
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Appendix E

Appendix E. Effective lengths of struts

in rigid frames
E.1 General
The effective length, LE, of a column in a multi-storey
beam and column-type frame with rigid joints may be Ku
assessed using the limited frame method given in E.2.
For buildings which do not satisfy the conditions for a KTL k, KTR
non-sway frame given in 5.1.3 the stiffening effect of infill
Column being Kc =IlL
wall panels may be taken into account using the method
designed
given in E.3. Other cases including the effects of axial loads KsR
KsL
in the restraining members may be dealt with by reference
k2
to E.4.
KL

E.2 Limited frame method

E.2.1 Effective length

The effective length, LE, of a column may be obtained by
using the limited frame shown in figure 22. The effective
length ratio, LEIL, may be obtained from figures 23 or 24
as appropriate using the joint restraint coefficients, k 1
and k 2 , obtained from:
Total column stiffness at joint
k = -----------~--
Total stiffness of all members at joint
Where any member shown in figure 22 is not present in the
actual structure or is not rigidly connected to the column
being designed its stiffness should be taken as zero. where K u and K L are the values for II L for the
adjacent upper and lower column lengths
Where under the same loading condition any restraining
member is required to carry more than 90 %of its reduced
moment capacity (i.e. moment capacity reduced for axial and KTL• KTR• K 8 L and K 8 R are the values of IlL
load) its stiffness should be taken as zero. If one end of the for the adjacent beams
column is loaded to more than 90% of its reduced moment
capacity then the joint restraint coefficient, k, tor that end Figure 22. Restraint coefficients for limited frame
should be taken as unity.

E.2.2 Beam stiffness

The stiffness, K b• of a beam directly supporting a concrete
floor slab should be taken as II L.
In any other case K b should be determined as given in E.4.1.

E.2.3 Base stiffness

The base stiffness should be determined by reference
to 5.1.2.4.

103
 )>aJ
'0(/)
'0(11
C'Oco
5_(11
-·0
X ..
m-e
m
::I.

Fixed
__
k 2,___ _ Pinned

Figure 23. Effective length ratio LE/L for a column in a Figure 24. Effective length ratio Le!L for a column in a
rigid-jointed frame braced against sidesway for k 3 =oo rigid-jointed frame with unrestricted sidesway for k 3 = 0
 )>lXI
-ccn
Figure 25. Effective length ratio LE/L for a column in a rigid-jointed Figure 26. Effective length ratio LE/L for a column in a rigid-jointed "'0(11
frame with partial sway bracing of relative stiffness k 3 = 1 mco
frame with partial sway bracing of relative stiffness k 3 = 2 5_U1
-·0
X ••
m-e
I»
;:::.
_.
BS 5950: Part 1 1990
Appendix E

E.3 Partial sway bracing where

E.3.1 Introduction
Where buildings do not satisfy the conditions for non-sway
frames given in 5.1.3 the stiffening effect of wall panels
may be taken into account. Providing that the panels
comply with E.3.2, figures 25 and 26 may be used in
association with the method given in E.2.
The relative stiffness, k 3 , is given in E.3.3. For intermediate
values of k 3 between 0 and 1 or 1 and 2 interpolation may
be carried out using figure 24 for k 3 = 0.
E.3.2 Wall panels
To be effective a wall panel should be located in the plane
of the frame and extend the full clear height of the storey.
It may be composed of any material capable of resisting a
diagonal compressive force.
E.3.3 Relative stiffness
The relative stiffness, k 3 , of the effective bracing in any
storey may be' taken as:
h 2 "l:.S
k3 = P but :E;; 2
BOE"l:.Kc
where
h is the storey height;
"l:.Sp is the sum of the spring stiffnesses (horizontal force
per horizontal unit deflection) of the panels in that
storey of the frame (see E.3.4);
h is the storey height;
b is the width of the panel;
t is the thickness of the panel;
E P is the modulus of elasticity for the panel material.
E.4 Critical buckling mode of frames
E.4.1 Rectilinear frames
In a beam and column type rigid jointed frame (other than
a frame where the beams support a concrete floor slab)
the limited frame method given in E.2 may be used
provided that the frame is reasonably regular in layout.
In determining the stiffness, Kb, of a beam due account
should be taken of the degree of fixity afforded to its far
end in the relevant buckling mode of the frame.
The critical mode for a rectilinear frame in which sway is
prevented is shown in figure 27. The beams are bent in single
curvature and the relevant beam stiffness Kb = 0.5//L.
The critical sway mode for a rectilinear frame is shown in
figure 28. The beams are bent in double curvature and the
relevant beam stiffness, Kb, should be taken as 1.5//L.
Where the in-plane effective lengths have a significant
influence on the design it may be preferable to obtain the
effective lengths from the elastic critical load factor, Aero
of the frame (see appendix F).
E.4.2 Axial loads

E is the modulus of elasticity of steel;
"l:.Kc is the sum of the stiffnesses 1/L of the columns in
that storey of the frame.
E.3.4 Stiffness of panels
The spring stiffness, SP, of a wall panel may be determined
from:
The limited frame method given in E.2 may be extended to
rigid jointed frames in which the restraining members are
subject to axial loads. This is providing that:
(a) the frame satisfies the conditions of 5.1.3 for non-
sway frames;
(b) proper account is taken of the effects of axial load
on the stiffness of the restraining members.

Figure 27. Critical buckling mode of frame Figure 28. Critical buckling mode of frame
braced against sidesway free to sway

106
 BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Appendix F and G

Appendix F. Frame instability where

h is the storey height;
F.1 General b is the width of the braced bay;
Frame instability, as covered by this appendix, is related to "EKe is the sum of the stiffness, II L, of the columns in
the design of multi-storey rigid-jointed frames subject to that storey.
sidesway. The elastic critical load factor, Acr• which may be
determined using the deflection method as given in F.2 or
any other recognized method, is used in the amplified sway Appendix G. Design of restrained members
moments method (see 5.6.3(b)) for elastic design and in the with an unrestrained compression flange
simple check for frame-stability (see 5.7.3.3) for plastic
design. The elastic critical load factor, A.cr, of a frame is the G.1 General
ratio by which each of the factored loads would have to be
increased to cause elastic instability. G. 1.1 Introduction
This appendix deals with the design of members or portions
of members between effective torsional restraints to both
F.2 Deflection method flanges which are restrained by intermediate restraints in
such a way as to leave a compression flange unrestrained.
F.2.1 Introduction
See figure 29.
An accurate method (ordinary linear elastic) should be used
to determine the horizontal deflections of the frame due to G.1.2 Failure mode
horizontal forces applied at each floor level and equal to
0.5% of the factored vertical loads applied at that leveL G.1.2.1 The capacity of the member should be checked
in accordance with 4.8.3.2.
Allowance should be made in this deflection calculation for
the degree of rigidity of the base as given in F.2.2. G.1.2.2 The buckling resistance should be checked
between intermediate restraints as given in 4.8.3.3 using an
F.2.2 Base stiffness effective length L E equal to the spacing of the intermediate
The base stiffness should be determined by reference restraints.
to 5.1.2.4. G.1.2.3 The overall buckling of the member in the
torsional mode between effective torsional restraints to
F.2.3 Value of Acr both flanges should be checked according to the provisions
1 of this appendix.
Acr =
20011s.max
G.1.3 Elastic stability
where <Ps.max is the largest value for any storey of the sway
index, <P. (see F.2.4). Members or portions of members restrained as in G.1.1
which do not contain plastic hinge locations should be
F.2.4 Sway index, <P. checked according to G.2(a) to ensure stability between
effective torsional restraints to both flanges.
The sway index, </J5 , of each storey is given by:
8u- 8L G.1.4 Plastic stability
<P s = -'-...,---=-
h Members or portions of members restrained as in G.1.1
where which contain plastic hinge locations should be checked
h is the storey height; according to G.2(b) to ensure stability between effective
torsional restraints to both flanges.
8 u is the horizontal deflection of the top of the storey;
Full lateral restraint should be provided to the compression
8 L is the horizontal deflection of the bottom of the
flange at all plastic hinge locations, or where this is
storey.
impracticable within D/2 of the hinge location where Dis
the depth of the member.
F.2.5 Partial sway bracing
In any storey the stiffening effect of infill wall panels as
given in E.3.3 (up to a maximum relative stiffness, k 3 , of 2) G.2 Stability
may be allowed for by introducing a diagonal strut in that
storey of area A given by: Members or portions of members restrained as in G.1.1
A= k3"EKc
h(h/b)
[1 + (h/b) 2] 3f2
should satisfy one of the following conditions to ensure
stability between effective torsional restraints.
(a) Elastic stability (see G.1.3)
( 1) Uniform members
F M
+ - ,;;;;1
Pc Mb
107
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Appendix G

6-*-x--x--x--x--x:--x--x--x- -B)112 *
A- -A .__£_

Uniform member
* Compression flange *
F H1(B- *--x--x--x--x--x--x--x--><--*-~~
~\- [ =t;- F
* Compression flange

--L!(:-*-x--x--x--x--x--x:--x--x-*~~

\- L lJ F

[ Com~•u:n fla~ _I
Tapered members
• Effective torsional restraints to both flanges. A-A Reference axis.
X Lateral restraints to one flange. 8-8 Restraint axis.
F Axial load where present. Lt Length under consideration.
M Applied moment in either direction.
Figure 29. Members restrained on tension flange

(2) Tapered members ATe is as defined in G.3.2;

F M M =mtMA;
A +S ~ Pb at any section. mt is as defined in G.3.4;
X

(b) Plastic stability (see G.1.4). For uniform members MA is the maximum moment on the member or portion
use ( 1) or (2); for tapered members use (2). of the member under consideration;
Mb =pbSx ~PyZ;
( 1) Lengths without lateral loads Pb is the lateral torsional buckling resistance
L ~~( Mp ) lf2 determined in accordance with 4.3.7 except that
t ymt Mpr +aF the equivalent slenderness should be taken as ATe;
ATe is as defined in G.3.3;
(2) Lengths with lateral loads M is the applied moment at the section considered;
Lk A is the cross·sectional area at the section considered;
Lt~--
c nt S,. is the plastic modulus at the section considered;
where MP =pvS,.;
F is the applied axial load where present; Mpr = PvS,,.;
Pc is the compression resistance determined in s.,. is the reduced plastic modulus due to axial load;
accordance with 4. 7.4 except that for buckling a is as defined in G.3.1;
about the minor axis the slenderness should be Lk is as defined in G.3.5;
taken as ATe; nt is as defined in G.3.6;
c is as defined in G.3.3.

108
 BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Appendix G

G.3 Determination of factors

G.3. 1 General
See figure 30.

x Lateral restraints to one flange

Effective torsional restraints to both flanges
A-A Reference axis
8-8 Restraint axis
a Distance between reference axis and restraint axis
Lt Length over which buckling is to be checked

Figure 30. Typical haunch

G.3.2 Minor axis slenderness ratio, ATe For tapered members vt is calculated by reference to the
The minor axis slenderness ratio used to determine the smallest section:
compression resistance in G.2 should be taken as: where
ATe= YA a is as defined in G.3.1;
where A is as defined in G.3.2;
A is the slenderness Llr v of the member between h 5 is as defined in G.3.2;
effloot;,. to,.;on(~1':';"" to blo;~ flanges; x is as defined in 4.3.7.5;
u is as defined in 4.3.7.5 except for tapered members

y • 1+ ( ; ) ' ~~fo (~)' where u should be taken as 1.0;

nt is taken as 1.0 where there are no intermediate loads
between restraints; otherwise nt is as defined in G.3.6;
a is as defined in G.3.1; c is taken as 1.0 for uniform members and as follows
h 5 is the distance between the shear centres of the for tapered members:
flanges; 3 2j lj
c=l+--(R-1) 3q 2
x is as defined in 4.3.7.5. x-9
where
G.3.3 Minor axis slenderness ratio, ATB
R is the ratio of the greater depth to the lesser depth
The minor axis slenderness ratio, ATe, used to determine of the section between effective torsional restraints;
the bending resistance in G.2 should be taken as:
q is the ratio of the tapered length to the total length
of the section between effective torsional restraints.

G.3.4 Equivalent uniform moment factor, mt

The value of mt should be taken as 1.0 when intermediate
loads are applied between effective torsional restraints.

109
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Appendix G

Otherwise mt should be obtained from table 39 where: Only positive values of N should be included.
y is obtained from G.3.2; N is positive when it produces compression in
the unrestrained flange.
f3t
is the ratio of the algebraically smaller end moment to
the larger. Moments which produce compression on Where axial load is present see G.3.6.2.
the unrestrained flange should be taken as positive. M 1 to M 5 are the moment capacities of the sections
When f3t < -1 the value of f3t should be taken as -1. corresponding to N 1 to N 5 , but see G.3.6.3.
See figure 31. Ns N2 N3 N4
NOTE. This definition of i3t is different to that given for {3 Ms is the greater of M 2 , M 3 , M4
in 4.3.7.
NE N1 N 5
is the greater of - ,
G.3.5 Limiting length, L k ME M1 M5
The limiting length, Lb should be taken as:
Only positive values of (Ns - NE ) should be
( 5.4 + 600 7) r yx included.
Ms ME

= )I
Lk
(5.4 7 x2- 1 h G.3.6.2 Axial loading. Where elastic stability is considered
no allowance should be made in the value of nt for the
where x is as defined in 4.3.7.5. For tapered members Lk effects of axial load.
should be calculated for the smallest section. Where plastic stability is being considered the values of N 1
to N 5 should be taken as:
G.3.6 Slenderness correction factor, nt
N+aF
G.3.6.1 General. The general expression of the slenderness where
correction factor, nt, is given by:
a is the distance between the reference axis and the axis
nt =[ _1_ { N 1 + 3N 2 + 4N 3 of restraint;
12 M, M2 M3 F is the applied axial load.
G.3.6.3 Moment capacities. For elastically designed
+ 2 ( :: - ::) } J 'h members of uniform section M 1 toM 5 should be taken as:
M=pvZx
where
where Z x is the elastic modulus for the compression flange
N 1 to N 5 are the values of the applied moments at the of the section.
ends of the quarter points and mid length of
the length between effective torsional restraints In all other cases Misgiven by:
as shown in figure 32. M = PvSx
where Sx is the plastic modulus of the section.

-300 -100
(3 - --3 {3 = - - =-0.3
t- +100 - t +300
taken as -1.0.

Figure 31. Value of f3t

110
 BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Appendix G and H

Table 39. Equivalent uniform moment factor, mt

I~-1.0
0

1.00
0.1

0.76
0.2

0.61
0.3

0.51
0.4

0.44
0.5

0.39
0.6

0.35
0.7

0.31
0.8

0.28
0.9

0.26
1.0

0.24
1. 1

0.22
1.2

0.21
-0.9 1.00 0.78 0.63 0.52 0.45 0.40 0.36 0.32 0.30 0.28 0.26 0.24 0.23
-0.8 1.00 0.80 0.64 0.53 0.46 0.41 0.37 0.34 0.32 0.30 0.28 0.27 0.26
-0.7 1.00 0.81 0.66 0.55 0.47 0.42 0.39 0.36 0.34 0.32 0.30 0.29 0.28
-0.6 1.00 0.83 0.67 0.56 0.49 0.44 0.40 0.38 0.36 0.34 0.33 0.32 0.31

-0.5 1.00 0.85 0.69 0.58 0.50 0.46 0.42 0.40 0.38 0.37 0.36 0.35 0.34
-0.4 1.00 0.86 0.70 0.59 0.52 0.48 0.45 0.43 0.41 0.40 0.39 0.38 0.37
-0.3 1.00 0.88 0.72 0.61 0.54 0.50 0.47 0.45 0.44 0.43 0.42 0.41 0.41
-0.2 1.00 0.89 0.74 0.63 0.57 0.53 0.50 0.48 0.47 0.46 0.45 0.45 0.44
-0.1 1.00 0.90 0.76 0.65 0.59 0.55 0.53 0.51 0.50 0.49 0.49 0.48 0.48

0.0 1.00 0.92 0.78 0.68 0.62 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.54 0.53 0.52 0.52 0.52

0.1 1.00 0.93 0.80 0.70 0.65 0.62 0.59 0.58 0.57 0.57 0.56 0.56 0.56
0.2 1.00 0.94 0.82 0.73 0.68 0.65 0.63 0.62 0.61 0.61 0.60 0.60 0.60
0.3 1.00 0.95 0.84 0.76 0.71 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.64 0.64
0.4 1.00 0.96 0.86 0.79 0.75 0.72 0.71 0.70 0.70 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69
0.5 1.00 0.97 0.88 0.82 0.78 0.76 0.75 0.75 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.74

0.6 1.00 0.98 0.91 0.85 0.82 0.81 0.80 0.79 0.7S 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79
0.7 1.00 0.98 0.93 0.89 0.87 0.85 0.85 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84
0.8 1.00 0.99 0.95 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89
0.9 1.00 1.00 0.98 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94
1.0 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00

Ns

Figure 32. Intermediate moments

L------------------------------------------··~------------------------------~

Appendix H. Web buckling where

Aw is the equivalent slenderness of the web given by:
H.1 Shear buckling without utilizing (0.6Pyw I qe)
lf2
tension field action qe is the elastic critical shear strength of the panel (in
N/mm 2 ) given by:
The critical shear strength, qcr• of a web panel is given by
the following.
(a) When Aw .;;;; 0.8
(1) when a/d.;;;; 1: Qe = [ 075+
. (a/d) 2
J
-1- [1000]
--
d/t
2

2
qcr = 0.6Pyw
(2) when a/d > 1: Q 8 0.75] [ 1000]
= [ 1 + (a/d)
(b) When 0.8 < Aw < 1.25 2 d/t
qcr = 0.6Pyw [1- 0.8(Aw- 0.8)] a is the spacing of transverse stiffeners;
(c) When Aw ~ 1.25 d is the depth of the web;
is the thickness of the web;
Pvw is the design strength of the web.

111
BS 5950 : Part 1 1990
Appendix H

H.2 Shear buckling utilizing tension (b) when fe is tensile

field action
The basic shear strength of the web panel, qb• is given by: [(
fed\ 2- (~\ 2] y, fed)
when ( - -
2
> ( -fe-)
2

Ped) Pe.er) Ped Pe.er

- + y
qb - qcr 2 [ a/d + ( 1 + (a/dl 2) 1h ] 2 2 2
or- [(-fe-) - (fed
- -) ] Y, when ( -fe-) 2 > (fed)
--
where Pe.er Ped pe.er ,Ped
Yb is the basic tension field strength given by:
Y b = (p yw 2 - 3q cr 2 + ,/, 2) 1/2 - ,/, where
'l't 'l't
1.5qcr Mw is the maximum ·moment in the web panel;
in which r/Jt = 2 11
Mer is the buckling resistance moment of the web
(1 +(a/d) ) 12
panel given by:
The flange-dependent shear strength factor, Qf, is given by:
Mer= Pb.erSw;

qt= [ 4y3 sin(~) (~:) 112 ] X 0.6Pvw

Pb.er is the critical bending strength of the web panel
given by:

where 8 = tan- 1 ( :) 2
1630)
("d/t
Pb.er =
a is the spacing of transverse stiffeners;
d is the depth of the web; Sw is the plastic modulus of the web (t~2 )
t is the thickness of the web;
is the mean longitudinal compressive stress in the
Pvw is the design strength of the web. web (if this stress is tensile fe is negative);
NOTE. If qb is greater than 0.57 Pyw it may be taken as equal to
Pe.er is the critical axial strength of the web panel
but not greater than 0.6Pyw·
given by the following:
( 1) when one flange is in tension:
H.3 Thin or slender webs designed for
2
combined stresses
H.3.1 General
Pe.er = (~~:) ;

This clause is for checking thin or slender webs which have

(2) when both flanges are subject to compression:
been designed as subject to longitudinal stresses due to
bending or directly applied loads. The longitudinal stresses (i) for sections built-up by welding
should be considered as consisting of either:
2
p = 815)
(- - but..;;; _43pv
_ __
(a) pure bending stress (equal compressive and tensile
stresses symmetrical about the mid-depth of the panel); e.er d/t 15 + d/te
(b) pure bending stress combined with uniform axial (ii) for rolled sections
stress. This arises whenever the mid-depth of the panel
does not coincide with the neutral axis of the girder,
whether or not an axial load is applied. P = (815) 2 but.;;; 43pv
e.er d/t 4 + d/te
H.3.2 Combination of stresses
fll is the maximum shear stress in the panel;
The following interaction expression should be satisfied:
Pq is the shear buckling strength of the web panel.
Generally Pq = qcr but if the web is designed
using tension field action as given in 4.4.5.4 then
Pq = qb;
is the basic shear strength of the web panel as
When compressive edge loading is also applied (see 4.5.2.2) given in 4.4.5.4.1;
the term fe!Pe.er should be replaced as follows:
is the critical shear strength of the web panel as
(a) when fc is compressive given in 4.4.5.3;
is the compression stress due to edge loading
2 2
[( fe ) + (fed ) ] Y, as given in 4.5.2.2 (if edge loading is tensile fed is
Pe.cr Ped zero);
Ped is the compressive strength for edge loading as
given in 4.5.2.2.

112
Publications referred to
BS 4 Structural steel sections
Part 1 Specification tor hot rolled sections
BS 18 Method for tensile testing of metals (including aerospace materials)
Part 1 Steel (general)
Part 4 Steel tubes
BS 29 Specification tor carbon steel forgings above 150 mm ruling section
BS 639 Specification for covered carbon and carbon manganese steel electrodes tor manual metal -arc welding
BS 709 Methods of destructive testing fusion welded joints and weld metal in steel
BS 2573 Rules for the design of cranes
Part 1 Specification for classification. stress calculations and design criteria tor structures
BS 2655 Specification tor lifts, escalators, passenger conveyors and paternosters
BS 2853 Specification for the design and testing of steel overhead runway beams
BS 3100 Specification tor steel castings for general engineering purposes
BS 3692 Specification for ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts. Metric units
BS 4190 Specification for ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
BS 4320 Specification tor metal washers for general engineering purposes. Metric units
BS 4360 Specification for weldable structural steels
BS 4395 Specification for high strength friction grip bolts and associated nuts and washers for structural engineering
Part 1 General grade
Part 2 Higher grade bolts and nuts and general grade washers
Part 3 Higher grade bolts (waisted shank), nuts and general grade washers
BS 4449 Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete
BS 4482 Specification for cold reduced steel wire for the reinforcement of concrete
BS 4483 Specification tor steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete
BS 4604 Specification for the use of high strength friction grip bolts in structural steelwork. Metric series
Part 1 General grade
Part 2 Higher grade (parallel shank)
Part 3 Higher grade (waisted shank)
BS 4848 Specification for hot rolled structural steel sections
Part 2 Hollow sections
Part 4 Equal and unequal angles
Part 5 Bulb flats
BS 4933 Specification tor ISO metric black cup and countersunk head bolts and screws with hexagon nuts
BS 5135 Specification for the process of arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels
BS 5400 Steel, concrete and composite bridges
Part 3 Code of practice for the design of steel bridges
Part 10 Code of practice tor fatigue
BS 5493 Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steel structures against corrosion
BS 5950 Structural use of steelwork in building
Part 2 Specification for materials, fabrication and erection : hot rolled sections
Part 3 Design in composite construction
Section 3.1 Code of practice for design of single and continuous composite beams
*Section 3.2 Code of practice for design of composite columns and frames
Part 4 Code of practice for design of floors with profiled steel sheeting
Part 5 Code of practice for design of cold formed sections
BS 6399 Loading for buildings
Part 1 Code of practice for dead and imposed loads
Part 3 Code of practice for imposed roof loads
BS 8004 Code of practice for foundations
BS 8110 Structural use of concrete
Part 1 Code or practice for design and construction
CP 3 Code of basic data for the design of buildings
Chapter V Loading
Part 2 Wind loads
ISO 2394 General principles on reliability for structures

*In preparation.

This British Standard, having been prepared under the direction of
the Civil Engineering and Building Structures Standards Policy
Committee, was published under the authority of the Board of BSI
and comes into effect on 31 July 1990
©British Standards Institution, 1990
First published August 1985
Second edition July 1990
ISBN 0 580 18566 4
The following BSI references relate to the work on this standard:
Committee reference CSB/27 Draft for comment 87/15229 DC
British Standards Institution. Incorporated by Royal Charter, BSI is
the mdependent national body for the preparation of British
Standards. It IS the UK member of the International Organization
for Standardization and UK sponsor of the British National
Committee of the International Electrotech11ical Commission.
In addition to the preparation and promulgation of standards, BSI
offers specialist services including the provision of information
through the BSI Library and Standardline Database; Technical Help
to Exporters; and other services. Adv1ce can be obtained from the
Enquiry Sect1on, BSI, Milton Keynes MK14 6LE, telephone
0908 221166, telex 825777.
Copyright. Users of British Standards are reminded that copyright
subsists'" all BSI publications. No part of th1s publication may be
reproduced in any form without the prior permission in writing of
BSI. This does not preclude the free use, in the course of
BS 5950 · Part 1 · 1990
implementing the standard, of necessary details such as symbols and
size, type or grade designations. Enquiries should be addressed to
the Pub I icat•ons Manager, BS I, Linford Wood, Milton Keynes
MK 14 6LE. The number for telephone enqu~ries is 0908 220022
and for telex 825777.
Contract requirements. A British Standard does not purport to
include all the necessary provisions of a contract. Users of British
Standards are responsible for their correct application.
Revision of British Standards. Bnt1sh Standards are rev1sed, when
necessary, by the issue either of amendments or of rev1sed editions.
It is important that users of British Standards should ascertain that
they are in possession of the latest amendments or editions.
Automatic updating service. BSI provides an economic, individual
and automatic standards updat1ng serv1ce called PLUS. Details are
available from BSI Enquiry Section at Milton Keynes, telephone
0908 221166, telex 825777.
Information on all BSI publ1cat•ons IS in the BSI Catalogue,
supplemented each month by BSI News wh1ch is available to
subscr1b1ng members of BSI and gives details of new publications,
revis•ons, amendments and withdrawn standards. Any person who,
when mak1ng use of a Br~tish Standard, encounters an Inaccuracy or
amb19U1ty, •s requested to notify BSI Without delay 1n order that
the matter may be mvest1gated and appropriate action taken.

Committees responsible for this British Standard

The preparation of this British Standard was entrusted by the
Civil Engineering and Building Structures Standards Policy
Committee ICSB/-) to Technical Committee CSB/27, upon which
the following bodies were represented:
British Constructional Steelwork Association Ltd
British Railways Board
British Steel Industry
Department of the Environment (Property Services Agency)
Department of the Environment (Building Research Establishment)
Department of the Environment (Construction Industries
Directorate)
Health and Safety Executive
Institution of Civil Engineers
Institution of Structural Engineers
Royal Institute of British Architects
Steel Construction Institute
Welding Institute

Amendments issued since publication OJ

CJ)
(J"I
Amd. No. Date of issue Text affected <.0
(J"I
0

----~-·---

....lo
<.0
<.0
0

British Standards Institution · 2 Park Street London W1 A 2BS · Telephone 071-629 9000 · Telex 266933

9504- 11 CSB/27